JP6904411B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

In the gaming machine of the pachinko machine or the like, there is performed a lottery whether a hit on the basis in particular of game ball is won to Jo Tokoro of start hole. In addition to Jo Tokoro of starting opening, winning balls by ball is winning entry prize port is known that is provided to be paid out. The Among conventional game machine, for example, by varying the prize number balls to be paid out when the ball is winning according to the type of winning hole, there those working to interest improved.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2001-129177

However, there was a need for further improvement in interest.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player 's interest in playing a game.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve this object, the game ball that is launched in a particular direction is provided on ball entrance possible positions, Yu technique ball first shape capable ball entrance on purpose, the first second shaped game balls than 1 state becomes difficult ball entrance on purpose, a variable, variable ball entrance means, and determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of evaluation criteria, in the determination by the determination means based on the fact that a specific determination result, and a variable game execution means for executing a variable game that said variable ball entrance means is a predetermined number of times the variable to said first state from said second state cage, before Symbol a first ball entrance means that a particular direction launched the game balls provided in ball entrance possible position input before Symbol fired gaming balls before Symbol first ball entrance means into a specific direction a first position that enables the sphere, a variable, variable means and a second position not easily ball entrance, in to its first Yu TECHNICAL ball first ball entrance means than the position, the firing in the specific direction A second ball-entry means that is provided at a position where the pachinko ball can enter and is different from the first ball-entry means, and a specification that is not performed when the game ball enters the second ball-entry means. The first ball-entry means is provided with a means for increasing the degree of advantage when the game ball enters the first ball-entry means, and the second ball- entry means is the variable means. A game ball that has flowed down in the direction of the variable means while the variable means has been changed to the second position, rather than a game ball that has flowed down in the direction of the variable means in the state of being changed to the first position. provided the induced easily position toward said varying means, during the execution of the variable game, in the first position while the variable ball entrance means is a variable in the second state variably, said variable ball entrance means a configuration which may be variable in the second location while is variable in the first state, the gaming machine, and ball entrance to the first ball entrance means display mode according to the number of game balls Ru configuration der displayable in a predetermined specified period a specified display mode that can be updated.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 includes a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball in the gaming machine according to claim 1.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the game ball that is launched in a particular direction is provided on ball entrance possible positions, a first shaped Yu Technical sphere capable ball entrance on purpose, a game ball than its first state There was a variable, variable ball entrance means to the second form on purpose, it becomes difficult ball entrance, a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of discrimination conditions, a specific determination result in the determination by the determination means in particular on the basis, the variable game execution means for executing a variable game variable ball entrance means is a predetermined number of times the variable to said first state from said second state comprises a prior SL specific direction a first position where the first ball entrance means a fired game balls provided in ball entrance possible positions prior Symbol fired gaming balls to a specific direction becomes possible ball entrance before Symbol first ball entrance means When its second position in which hardly ball entrance to the first Yu TECHNICAL ball first ball entrance means of the position, a variable, variable means, the game ball that is launched into the specific direction is ball entrance By performing a second ball entry means that is provided at a possible position and different from the first ball entry means, and a specific process that is not performed when a game ball enters the second ball entry means. A means for increasing the degree of advantage when a game ball enters the first ball-entry means to a high degree of advantage, and the second ball-entry means is such that the variable means is changed to the first position. A game ball that has flowed down in the direction of the variable means while the variable means is variable to the second position is more likely to be guided than a game ball that has flowed down in the direction of the variable means while the variable means is in the position. provided at a position, the varying means, said during variable game execution, is variable in the first position while the variable ball entrance means is a variable in the second state, the variable ball entrance means a configuration which may be variable in the second location while is variable in the first state, the gaming machine, depending on the number of gaming balls that ball entrance to the first ball entrance means Ru configuration der viewable in a specific period of time predetermined specific display mode the display mode may be updated.

This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (A) is a diagram illustrating a display screen on which a right-handed navigation is displayed, and (b) is a diagram illustrating a display screen on which a right-handed warning image is displayed. (A) is a diagram exemplifying a display screen during a big hit, and (b) is a diagram exemplifying a display screen when a ball enters a high-value winning opening during a jackpot. (A) and (b) are diagrams illustrating a display screen on which a warning image is displayed. It is a front view of the storage device. (A) is a diagram showing the traveling direction of the sphere that has flowed into the storage device when the storage valve is closed, and (b) is a diagram that has flowed into the storage device when the storage valve is open. It is a figure which shows the traveling direction of a sphere. It is a figure which shows the upstream side of the path provided on the right side of a game board. It is a figure which shows the downstream side of the path provided on the right side of a game board. (A) is a diagram showing a state in which the first specific winning opening is opened, and (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the second specific winning opening is opened. (A) is a diagram showing the path of the ball when the first specific winning opening is closed, and (b) is a diagram showing the path of the ball when the first specific winning opening is open. (A) is a diagram showing the path of the ball when the second specific winning opening is closed, and (b) is a diagram showing the path of the ball when the second specific winning opening is open. (A) is a diagram showing the traveling direction of a ball that has entered the second variable winning device with the probability-changing ball opening closed, and (b) is a diagram showing the traveling direction of the ball with the probability-changing ball opening opened. It is a figure which shows the traveling direction of the ball which entered into the 2nd variable winning apparatus in the state of being. (A) is a diagram showing the timekeeping change between the state of the second specific winning opening and the state of the flow path in the second variable winning device in the 12th round of the jackpot A, and (b) is a diagram showing the timed change of the jackpot B 12 It is a figure which shows the timekeeping change of the state of the 2nd specific winning opening and the state of the flow path in the 2nd variable winning apparatus in the round | It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. It is a figure, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the RAM in a main control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the winning command setting process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the error notification processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the hit-time notification processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the normal time notification processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. It is a flowchart which showed the ending command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram illustrating a display screen when the storage valve of the second embodiment is closed, and (b) is a display screen when the storage valve of the second embodiment is open. It is an illustrated figure. It is a front view of the storage device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram illustrating the case where the ball flowing into the storage device is guided to the high-value winning opening when the storage valve in the second embodiment is closed, and (b) is a diagram illustrating the case where the ball has flowed into the storage device. 2 is a diagram illustrating a case where a ball flowing into a storage device is guided to a small value winning opening when the storage valve in the second embodiment is closed. It is a figure which illustrated the traveling direction of the sphere which flowed into the storage device when the storage valve in 2nd Embodiment is open. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first type selection table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control device in the second embodiment. is there. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the storage control processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the warning process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the storage time notification processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the release notification processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which illustrated the display screen during the jackpot in the modified example of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the downstream side of the path provided on the right side of the game board in the modification of 1st Embodiment. (A) is a plan view of the storage device and the second variable winning device in a state where the slide member of the modified example of the first embodiment is projected toward the front side of the front view, and (b) is a modified version of the first embodiment. It is a top view of the storage device and the 2nd variable winning device in the state where the slide member of an example is buried in the back side of the front view. It is a figure which shows the definition content of the 1st type selection table in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning opening closing process executed by MPU in the main control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the error notification process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-time notification process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the modification of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the traveling direction of the ball which flowed into the storage device with the ball stored in the storage device in the modified example of 2nd Embodiment in a state which is unfavorable arrangement for a player. It is a figure which shows the traveling direction of the ball which flowed into the storage device with the ball stored in the storage device in the modified example of 2nd Embodiment in a state which is advantageous for a player. It is a figure which shows the suggestion display image displayed on the display screen in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the release suggestion display process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the storage state command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 2nd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball (game ball) flowing down in front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 17) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 17) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, lighting portions 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is chrome-plated, is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when discharging the ball stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ash plate 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, and a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance and a windmill (movable member 310 are shown, and the others are shown). In addition to the rails 61 and 62 (not shown), the general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second entry opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the normal entry opening (not shown). The through gate) 67, the variable display device unit 80, the storage device 600, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the variable display device unit 80, and the storage device 600 are base plates 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the through hole formed in the above, and is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 17) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guidance passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn by taking the opportunity of winning a prize in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, and the ball normally enters the ball 67. When it passes, a lottery of ordinary symbols (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery of special symbols performed for the balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and it is also determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If so, the jackpot type is also determined. For convenience of explanation, the lottery of the special symbol performed for the entry into the first entrance 64 is referred to as the "lottery of the special symbol 1", and the lottery is performed for the entry into the second entry 640. The lottery of the special symbol is called "lottery of special symbol 2".

When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, which are normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse). Alternatively, the opening operation is repeated 15 times (15 rounds) (until 10 balls are won). More specifically, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won), and 12 In the round, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won). As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

In addition, inside the second variable winning device 650, there are two types of ball entrances (probability variable ball opening 654 and normal ball entry) for determining the added value after the end of the jackpot given after the end of the special game state. A mouth 655) is provided (see FIG. 15). Although the details will be described later, when the ball enters the probability variation entrance 654 in the special game state, the “high probability state of the special symbol” is given as an added value after the end of the big hit. On the other hand, if the ball never enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 654 during the special game state, the "normal symbol time saving state" is given as an added value after the jackpot ends. There are two types of special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B" (see FIG. 18B). Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a is configured differently depending on the jackpot type, and the ease of entering the ball into the probabilistic entry ball opening 654 is different.

When the lottery of the special symbol (first symbol) is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and the lottery result is obtained after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed. The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry times is different for each type of entry opening. Each is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 (the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 1) or the number of reserved balls for the second entry port 640 (special). If the number of reserved balls of symbol 2) remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed, and the variable display according to the lottery is started. If both the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is determined. When the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second entry port 640. It will be easy. That is, when the ball hits the normal symbol, the ball is likely to enter the second entry port 640, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, the normal symbol is displayed. The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is held by the first symbol display device 37. Along with being displayed, it is also shown on the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entry port 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display according to the lottery is displayed. It will be started.

In both cases of "big hit A" and "big hit B", the number of rounds is 15 rounds in a special gaming state (15R big hit). Further, in the special game state, when the ball enters the probability variation entrance 654, the pachinko machine 10 has a high special symbol from the end of the big hit to the next big hit as an added value after the end of the big hit. It shifts to the probability state (during the probability change of the special symbol). On the other hand, if the ball never enters the probability change entrance 654 in the special game state, as an added value after the jackpot ends, from the end of the jackpot until the end of the special symbol lottery 100 times. During that time, it shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol. In addition, when shifting to the time saving state of the normal symbol after the end of the big hit, it also shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol. The low-probability state of this special symbol continues until the next big hit. Although the details will be described later, in the "big hit B", the ball is more likely to enter the probability variation entrance 654 during the special game state (during the big hit state) than in the "big hit A". That is, since the "big hit B" is more likely to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit, it is more likely to be the big hit again at short intervals after the end of the big hit. Therefore, the "big hit B" is a more advantageous jackpot for the player than the "big hit A".

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" refers to the state in which the probability of the subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during the so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, to the special gaming state. It is a state of the game that is easy to shift. The high-probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol) in the present embodiment includes the state of the game in which the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased and the ball is easily won in the second entrance 640. .. On the other hand, the "low probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the probability of the special symbol is not changing, and the jackpot probability is a normal state, that is, a state in which the probability of the jackpot is lower than that during the probability change of the special symbol. In addition, the time saving state of the normal symbol (during the time saving) is a state of the game in which the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased and the ball is easily won in the second entry port 640. On the other hand, the normal state is a state of the game in which neither the probability change of the special symbol nor the time reduction of the normal symbol is increased (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) are not increased).

During the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, not only the hit probability of the normal symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, and the normal state is obtained. A longer time is set compared to. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second entrance 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy to do. Therefore, during the probabilistic change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640. That is, a lottery for special symbols is likely to be performed.

It should be noted that, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time. , The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened when the normal symbol is hit may be increased as compared with the normal state. In addition, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) does not change during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened, and the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened. At least one of the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened are not changed, and the normal symbol (normal symbol) Only the hit probability of the second symbol) may be configured to be increased as compared with the normal state.

In the present embodiment, when the probabilistic state of the special symbol is given after the end of the special game state, the probabilistic state of the special symbol is configured to continue until the next jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may limit the number of times. Specifically, for example, the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol is given from the end of the special game state to the end of the lottery of the special symbol 10 times, and after the lottery of the special symbol is completed 10 times. May be configured to be set to the normal state. Further, the number of times that the special symbol is in the probable change state is not limited to 10 times, and may be arbitrarily determined. Similarly, in the present embodiment, when the ball does not enter the probability variation entry ball opening 654 in the special game state, the time saving state of the normal symbol is set until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times. However, the time saving period of a normal symbol is not limited to 100 times, and may be arbitrarily determined.

A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). The device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate whether or not a lottery of special symbols performed in association with the entry (starting winning) into the first entry opening 64 or the second entry opening 640 is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by the lighting state, or a ball entered in the first entrance 64. Of these, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

If the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry is made. The number of balls is held up to 4 times for each type of entry port, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are each held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of times of holding is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of ordinary symbols). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, it corresponds to the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), the first symbol display device 37 executes a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) with that as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 17), for example, the upper, middle, and lower parts are displayed. Three symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 17), whereas the first symbol display device 37 displays the first symbol. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the device 37. Instead of the liquid crystal display, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 7. First, FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. Yes, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1,3,5,7,9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki and helmets, which are almost full on the front of the wooden box. Even numbers are added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that they are small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 17) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A", the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. On the other hand, in the case of "big hit B", the main number to which any one of all the numbers "0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9" including odd numbers is added is added. A variable display is performed in which the symbols are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols having the same number are not aligned.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed (reserved balls) among the balls that have entered the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the advance notice effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, the moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (a boy with a headband in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action different from the predetermined action or another character performs a predetermined action. A notice will be produced by appearing.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640. The number of balls entered is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number symbol, and the reserved ball number is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates that it is 4 balls. Further, when the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. Note that FIG. 4B is an example in which the number of reserved balls corresponding to the entry into the first entry port 64 is four. When a reserved ball corresponding to the entry into the second entry port 640 occurs, the reserved ball number symbol in a mode different from the reserved ball number symbol displayed in the small area Ds1 of FIG. 4 (a) is displayed. Will be done. As a result, the player can easily determine how many reserved balls correspond to the entry into the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the entry into the second entry port 640. You can check.

In the present embodiment, the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are each held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 5A, a display (right-handed navigation) prompting the third symbol display device 81 to launch the ball aiming at the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 is displayed. The display contents when it occurs will be described.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special symbol is in a probabilistic state or the normal symbol is in a time-saving state, the electric accessory 640a is easily released, so that the ball is moved to the right side of the game board 13. By launching (striking to the right), it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second entry port 640. Further, as will be described in detail later, if a big hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 2) performed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, the first entrance 64 It is more likely to be a "big hit B" than when a big hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 1) performed based on the ball entering the ball. Therefore, in the probabilistic state of the special symbol given after the end of the big hit and the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is advantageous for the player to execute the right-handed strike. In other words, even if the special symbol is set to the probabilistic state or the normal symbol is set to the time saving state, the ball cannot be entered into the second entrance 640 unless the player hits right, which is special. The player will not be able to fully receive the benefits of the probability change state of the symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the probabilistic state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol, the player displays the probabilistic state of the special symbol by displaying the image (right-handed navigation) illustrated in FIG. 5 (a). It is configured so that the benefits of being in a time-saving state of ordinary symbols can be surely obtained.

As illustrated in FIG. 5A, in the right-handed navigation, the characters "Aim to the right !!" are displayed for the small area Ds3 in the sub-display area Ds, and the characters are oriented to the right above and below. Three arrows are displayed. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the player obtains the benefits of being in the probabilistic state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol.

Next, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 5 (b). The warning image illustrated in FIG. 5B shows a right-handed hit even though it is not a period in which the player should hit the ball into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. This is an image (right-handed warning image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when it is determined that the image is being executed. More specifically, it is displayed when it is determined that the player is right-handed in a normal state (a state in which neither the probabilistic state of the special symbol nor the time saving state of the normal symbol).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so as to be difficult to open in a normal state (even if a right-handed hit is made, it is difficult to allow the ball to enter the second entry port 640). For this reason, when a right-handed hit is made in a normal state, the chance of receiving a special symbol lottery is reduced as compared with a case where a ball is hit at the first entry port 64 by a left-handed hit. That is, if a right-handed hit is made in a normal state, it is difficult to make a big hit, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, by displaying a right-handed warning image and prompting left-handed, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from losing money.

As illustrated in FIG. 5B, when it is determined that the player is right-handed in the normal state, a "warning" is given to the entire small display area Ds (small areas Ds1 to Ds3). And the characters "Play left-handed !!" are displayed. By displaying these characters, it is possible to remind the player that right-handed strikes should not be made (left-handed strikes should be made). In addition, the hall clerk also confirms the presence or absence of the right-handed warning screen (see FIG. 5 (b)) to determine whether or not there is a player who is executing an irregular game method of right-handed in a normal state. It can be easily identified.

As a method of determining whether or not a ball is hitting right, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) where the ball can flow in when hitting right. .. More specifically, when a ball enters either the general winning openings 601, 602 or the out openings 603a to 603c provided inside the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) (at each entry opening). When it is determined that the ball has passed through the provided ball entry switch), it is determined that the player is hitting right.

Here, the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) has a state in which the ball easily flows down to the general winning opening 601 (see FIG. 9A) and a ball flowing down to the general winning opening 602 according to the gaming state. It is set to two types of states, one that is easy to make (see FIG. 9B). Then, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state) (probability change state of the special symbol, time saving state of the normal symbol, normal state), the ball is set to a state in which the ball can easily flow down to the general winning opening 601. The general winning opening 601 is a winning opening in which the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters is smaller than that of the general winning opening 602 (for example, three). Therefore, even if a right-handed ball is hit in the normal state, there is little merit of letting the ball enter the storage device 600 (the number of balls held cannot be increased). That is, if the right-handed hit is executed in the normal state, the frequency of receiving the lottery of the special symbol is reduced and the number of balls held is also reduced, so that the disadvantage to the player is increased. For this reason, a right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B) is displayed in order to prevent the player from continuing to perform a game method that is disadvantageous to him (a game method in which he strikes right in a normal state). It is configured as follows.

As a factor for determining whether or not to display the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B), not only the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 that is easy to win in the normal state but also the winning is won. The reason why the presence or absence of a ball in the difficult general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 or the like is also determined is because the possibility of illegal game is taken into consideration. That is, in the normal state, by continuously illegally injecting balls into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 with a large number of winning balls (for example, 15 payouts), without going through a big hit. There is a possibility that an illegal game method of obtaining a large number of prize balls will be performed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has won (winned) into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the normal state, the player is left-handed (right). A right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5 (b)) prompting (not to hit) is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress illegal games.

In the present embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has entered any of the entry ports (general winning openings 601, 602, out openings 603a to 603c) provided in the storage device 600 in the normal state. Was configured to display a right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), when it is detected that a ball has won (winned) into a general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 with many winning balls to be paid out, an illegal game is performed. It may be configured to display a right-handed warning image by determining that it has been performed. As a result, the clerk in the hall can easily determine the presence or absence of fraud simply by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed warning image. In addition, when it is detected that a ball has entered the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), the hall computer is fraudulent. It may be configured to output a signal indicating. As a result, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 where the fraudulent activity is being performed.

In the present embodiment, the player strikes right based on detecting the entry of a ball into each entry port (general winning openings 601, 602, out openings 603a to 603c) provided inside the storage device 600. Although it is determined that the player is hitting right, the method of determining whether or not the player is hitting right is not limited to this. For example, when the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, it may be determined that the ball is hitting right, or the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. A known sensor capable of detecting the passage of the ball may be arranged on the top, and when the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor, it may be determined that the player is hitting right.

Next, with reference to FIG. 6, an example of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the special game state (during the jackpot state) will be described. FIG. 6A is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third round of the jackpot. As shown in the figure, when it becomes a big hit, for example, an image in which a boy character 710 discovers a treasure box 715 filled with treasure is displayed. This treasure suggests a large number of prize balls that the player obtains in the special gaming state (big hit state). With this display, the joy of winning the prize ball can be amplified, and thus the satisfaction of being a big hit can be given. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, a display area 714 for displaying the current number of rounds is provided in the upper left portion of the third symbol display device 81. In the example of FIG. 6A, the characters "ROUND3" are displayed on the display area 714. By checking this display, the player can recognize that the present is the third round of the jackpot. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the number of remaining rounds of the jackpot.

Further, in the upper right portion of the third symbol display device 81, a right-handed navigation image is displayed in the same manner as in the probabilistic state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol. That is, the characters "Aim to the right !!" are displayed for the small area Ds3, and right-pointing arrows are displayed above and below the characters. By displaying this right-handed navigation image, the player is made to recognize that the ball should be launched into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 during the special game state (during the jackpot state). be able to. If a left-handed player is hit despite the special game state (big hit state), the player is provided downstream of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 and is released in the special game state (big hit state). It becomes impossible to put the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, it becomes impossible to win a large number of prize balls, and the player loses. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 6A) is displayed even in the special game state (big hit state) to encourage the player to perform the right-handed hit. As a result, the player is configured to win a prize ball in the jackpot.

In addition, a winning number display area MA for displaying the number of winnings (balls) to the general winning opening 602 is formed in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in 6 (a), for example, the characters "EXTRA BONUS x 10" are displayed in the winning number display area MA. The characters "EXTRA BONUS" mean that a prize ball is obtained by a method different from the prize ball obtained by inserting the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. ing. Specifically, it means that a prize ball is obtained by inserting the ball into the general prize opening 602. In addition, the character "x10" indicates the number of times the ball has entered the general winning opening 602 in the jackpot. In the example of FIG. 6A, it means that the ball was inserted into the general winning opening 602 10 times in the 1st to 3rd rounds.

Further, a schematic view of the storage device 600 is displayed above the characters "EXTRA BONUS x 10", and the characters "EXTRA BONUS gate is open" are displayed above the schematic diagram. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the storage valve 604a is set to the open state (released state). Further, in the schematic view of the storage device 600 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a balloon with the characters "Aim!" Is displayed at the position of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. .. This balloon makes it possible for the player to recognize that it is advantageous (a large number of prize balls can be obtained) when the ball is inserted into the general prize opening 602.

Further, FIG. 6B is a diagram showing the display contents when the ball enters the general winning opening 602 in the special game state (big hit state). As shown in FIG. 6B, when a ball entering the general winning opening 602 is detected during the jackpot, the characters "GET" are displayed in the portion where the schematic diagram of the storage device 600 is displayed. At the same time, an image in which the ball enters a portion corresponding to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the schematic diagram of the storage device 600 is displayed. Further, in the winning number display area MA, the display content is changed from "EXTRA BONUS x 10" to "EXTRA BONUS x 11". As a result, the player can easily recognize that the winning ball has been obtained by entering the ball into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602.

In this way, by displaying the number of times the ball has entered the general winning opening 602 during the jackpot, the winning ball is separate from the winning balls into the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a in the jackpot. It is possible to make the player recognize the number of times the player has acquired. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the number of times of "EXTRA BONUS" (the number of times of entering the general winning opening 602) will increase. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, various warning images will be described with reference to FIG. 7. First, FIG. 7A is a diagram showing an example of a left-handed warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when left-handed in a special game state (big hit state). As shown in FIG. 7A, when it is determined that the player is left-handed, a large display area 716 for displaying a warning is formed in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in the large display area, the characters "warning" are displayed in large size, and the characters "right-handed aim at the attacker !!" are displayed below the characters "warning". By displaying these characters in the large display area, it is possible to make the player recognize that the current game method (left-handed) is an erroneous game method. Therefore, in the special game state (big hit state), the player can surely obtain a large amount of prize balls.

It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the player is hitting the left is determined by whether or not the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64. That is, by determining that the ball has entered the first entry port 64 during the special game state (during the jackpot state), it is determined that the player is making a left-handed hit, and the left-handed warning image ( Control is performed so as to display (see FIG. 7A).

In the present embodiment, a left-handed warning image (see FIG. 7A) is displayed when a ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected, but the present embodiment is not limited to this. .. For example, a passage sensor for detecting the passage of a ball is provided on a path (flow path) provided on the left side of the game board 13, and a left-handed warning image (left-handed warning image) when the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor during a big hit. It may be configured to display FIG. 7 (a)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 7B, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the storage device 600 will be described. Here, the abnormality of the storage device 600 is, for example, the case where a ball entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is detected in spite of the special gaming state (big hit state), or the special gaming state (big hit state). When a ball is detected in the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 even though it is not in the state), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred and a warning image is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 7B, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the storage device 600, the character "warning" is displayed in large size in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. At the bottom, the words "Call a gate error clerk" are displayed. From these characters, the player can determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, so that the clerk in the hall or the like can promptly request repairs or the like.

In addition, if the ball is fixed in a state where it is easy to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, which has a large number of winning balls that are always paid out, due to illegally changing the wiring, etc., the hole The clerk can determine the possibility of fraudulent activity only by checking the warning image (see FIG. 7B). Therefore, the ball is fixed to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter, and the ball is launched aiming at the storage device 600 to suppress fraudulent acts that increase the number of balls without a big hit. be able to.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The second symbol display device displays a symbol "○" and a symbol "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67. It is a variable display that lights up alternately for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is predetermined. It is configured to be in operation (open) for a period of time.

The time (variation time) required for the variation display of the second symbol is set so that the game state is shorter during the probability variation of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol than during the normal state. As a result, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) can be performed more than in the normal state. it can. Therefore, since the chances of hitting the normal symbol increase, it is possible to give the player many chances that the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 is opened. Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol and the time reduction of the normal symbol, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second entrance 640.

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the hit probability is increased, the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a are increased, and the like, the second entrance 640 is reached by other methods. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set shorter than in the normal state during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is constant regardless of the game state. Alternatively, the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for one hit of the normal symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The normal entry port 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the balls flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through. ing. When the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, a winning lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also lit and displayed by the second symbol holding lamp 84. .. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. It may be performed by using a part of the device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of a ball at the normal entry port 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). .. Further, the number of assembled ball entrances 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal ball entry port 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made at 110 (see FIG. 17), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37.

On the other hand, on the right side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80 (below the normal ball entry port 67), a second ball entry port 640 in which the ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second winning opening switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 17), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37.

In addition, the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entrance 640 are configured to be the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entrance 640 may be different. For example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entry port 64 is set to 3, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entry port 640 is set to 5. May be good.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. (Expanded state), and the ball can easily win a prize in the second entrance 640.

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than that in the normal state, and the time required for displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol is short, so that the fluctuation of the normal symbol is short. The "○" symbol is easily displayed on the display. Therefore, the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Further, during the probabilistic change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a is longer than that in the normal state. Therefore, during the probabilistic change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the prize in the second entry port 640 as compared with the normal state. On the other hand, the first ball entry port 64 does not have an electric accessory as provided in the second ball entry port 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first entry port 64 and when the ball wins in the second entry opening 640. is there. However, as a type of jackpot that is selected when a jackpot is hit, the probability of becoming a jackpot (big hit B) that makes it easy for the ball to enter the probability variation entry slot 654 during the special game state is the second entry slot 640. The case where the ball wins the ball is set higher than the case where the ball wins the first ball opening 64.

During normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second entry port 640. Therefore, the first entry ball without the electric accessory is provided. A ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and a lot of chances for a big hit lottery are obtained by winning a prize in the first entrance 64. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit.

On the other hand, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is likely to be opened by passing the ball through the normal entry port 67, and the second entry Since it is easy to win the ball opening 640, the ball is launched toward the second entry port 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and the ball is normally entered. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a jackpot B by passing the ball opening 67 to open the electric accessory and winning a prize in the second entry port 640.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a game depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the special symbol is in the probable change, the normal symbol is in the time saving, or the normal symbol is in the normal state). It is possible to make a person change the way of firing a ball between "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because the way of hitting the ball can be changed.

A first variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the first ball entry port 64 (lower left side of the second ball entry port 640), and a horizontally long rectangular first specific winning opening is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. (Large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, if a big hit is obtained in a lottery of special symbols performed due to winning a prize in the first ball slot 64 or the second ball slot 640, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, The first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a jackpot stop symbol. In addition, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is notified. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the first specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The first specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 14 times (14 rounds), for example. More specifically, the opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening 65a is executed in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds in the special gaming state. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the first specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (opening / closing solenoid) for driving the opening / closing to the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. (Not shown). The first specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win the first specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternately repeat the closed state and the closed state.

A second variable winning device 650 is provided on the lower left side of the first variable winning device 65, and a horizontally long rectangular second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is provided above the second variable winning device 650. .. The opening / closing plate covering the second specific winning opening 650a forms a closed state that prevents the ball from entering the second variable winning device 650 by protruding toward the front side of the front view (see FIG. 14A). ). On the other hand, it became a big hit by lottery of special symbols, and in the 12th round, the opening and closing plate covering the second specific winning opening 650a slides to the back side of the front view and is buried in the back side of the game board 13, and the ball is the first. 2 An open state in which a ball can be entered into the variable winning device 650 is formed (see FIG. 14 (b)).

As described above, based on the fact that the ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a in the special gaming state (during the jackpot) enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 654 provided inside the second variable winning device 650. , After the jackpot ends, it shifts to the probable state of the special symbol. On the other hand, if the ball does not enter the second specific winning opening 650a in the special game state, or even if the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a, all the balls enter the normal entry opening 655. If you do, it will shift to the normal symbol time saving state after the jackpot ends.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. In addition to the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, other winning openings may be provided as the winning openings opened in the special gaming state. On the contrary, the winning opening may be only the first specific winning opening 65a. Further, the arrangement position is not limited to the arrangement of the present embodiment, and may be arranged at any position.

A storage device 600 is provided on the right side of the first variable winning device 65. The storage device 600 is provided with a plurality of entry ports (general winning openings 601, 602 and out openings 603a to 603c) inside the storage device 600, and allows the entered balls to flow down to any of the entry openings. be able to. In addition, the storage device 600 can store (stop the flow) only one ball that has entered the inside of the storage device 600. Further, the storage device 600 is covered on the front side of the front view with a transparent cover body, and which entry port the ball that the player has flowed into (entered) into the storage device 600 enters. Is configured so that it can be easily confirmed. Details of the storage device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an outline of the storage device 600. As shown in FIG. 8, the storage device 600 is configured so that a ball can enter the inside of the storage device 600 via the guide flow path 605. The storage device 600 is configured so that when the player hits the ball to the right, one ball enters into approximately three of the launched balls. The ball that has not entered the induction flow path 605 flows down the upper left side of the storage device 600 in the direction of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, in the special gaming state, a part of the balls launched by the player toward the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a enters the storage device 600 via the induction flow path 605. It is configured in.

As shown in FIG. 8, inside the storage device 600, two types of flow paths branched by the branch member 604 are provided downstream of the induction flow path 605. Specifically, inside the storage device 600, an induction flow path 606 is provided on the left side in the front view. Most of the balls flowing down the induction flow path 606 enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 provided on the downstream side. The general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is provided with a detection switch 601a (not shown) that can detect that a ball has entered (passed). When it is detected by the detection switch 601a that a ball has entered the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, three prize balls are paid out. In addition, on the left and right of this general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, balls that did not enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 even though they flowed down the induction flow path 606 are discharged. Out ports 603a and 603b are provided for this purpose. With these out ports, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the accumulation of spheres inside the storage device 600, and to reliably discharge the spheres that have flowed down the induction flow path 606. Further, these out ports 603a and 603b are provided with detection switches 603a and 603b1 (not shown), respectively, as in the case of the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. With these detection switches 603a1 and 603b1, the number of ejected balls can be accurately determined.

Inside the storage device 600, a guide flow path 607 through which a ball can flow down is provided on the right side of the front view. Most of the game balls that have flowed down the induction flow path 607 enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 provided on the downstream side. The general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is provided with a detection switch 602a (not shown) that can detect that a ball has entered (passed). When it is detected by the detection switch 602a that a ball has entered the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, 15 prize balls are paid out. That is, more prize balls can be obtained when the ball enters the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 than when the ball enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. it can. Out ports 603b and 603c are provided on the left and right sides of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, respectively. These out ports prevent (suppress) the balls that did not enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 from accumulating inside the storage device 600, and allow the balls that have flowed down the induction flow path 607. It can be reliably discharged. Further, the out port 603c is provided with a detection switch 603c1 (not shown), similarly to the out ports 603a and 603b. The detection switch 603c1 can accurately determine the number of ejected balls.

Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is set to a state in which it is easy to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 when the special gaming state (big hit state) is reached. , In a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), it is set to a state in which it is easy to enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. That is, in the special gaming state, in addition to obtaining a large number of prize balls by opening the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, the general winning opening (high value winning) in the storage device 600 is obtained. It is configured so that a prize ball can be obtained by winning a prize in the mouth) 602. As a result, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one special game state (big hit state) can be increased, so that the player's merit by becoming a big hit can be enhanced. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game more enjoyably to be a big hit, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, which has a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out, is closed by the storage valve 607a, and the number of prize balls to be paid out is relatively large. The ball is set in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with few numbers. That is, in a state other than the special game state, there is little merit of letting the ball enter the storage device 600. Therefore, even in a state other than the special game state, the storage device 600 is always aimed at to receive a large amount of payout. It is possible to prevent (suppress) an irregular game method. As described above, the storage device 600 is configured such that one ball is inserted into approximately three right-handed balls. Then, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball is entered into the general prize opening (small value winning opening) 601 is three. That is, even if the right-handed hit is executed in the normal state, the lottery of the special symbol is difficult to be performed, and the number of balls cannot be increased by paying out based on the entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. Therefore, in the normal state, it is possible to make the player want to hit left.

A storage valve 607a is provided in the induction flow path 607. The storage valve 607a can block the guide flow path 607 by projecting toward the front side of the front view, and can prevent the ball from flowing down to the guide flow path 607. That is, the ball can be stopped (stored) at the upper part of the storage valve 607a. The storage valve 607a is configured to be driven by a storage device solenoid 610 (see FIG. 17). More specifically, by driving the solenoid 610 for the storage device, the storage valve 607a protrudes toward the front side of the front view (the state where the induction flow path 607 is blocked) and the storage valve 607a moves toward the back side of the front view. It is configured to be switchable to a buried state (a state in which a sphere can flow down the induction flow path 607). The ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a is prevented (suppressed) from flowing out to the guidance flow path 606 side by being surrounded by the inner wall of the guidance flow path 607 and the branch member 604. .. That is, the protruding portion 604a provided on the branch member 604 is set sufficiently high so that the ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a does not flow out.

Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the operation of the ball entering the storage device 600 will be described for each of the two possible states of the storage valve 607a described above. FIG. 9A is a diagram showing the operation of a ball that has entered the storage device 600 with the storage valve 607a protruding toward the front side, and FIG. 9B is a diagram showing the operation of the ball that has entered the storage device 600, and FIG. 9B shows the storage valve 607a on the back side of the front view. It is a figure which shows the operation of the ball which entered the storage device 600 in the state of being buried in.

As shown in FIG. 9A, more than half of the lower end of the guide flow path 605 overlaps with the upper end of the guide flow path 607. On the other hand, the upper end portion of the guidance flow path 606 is located on the left side of the central axis 605a of the guidance flow path 605 and hardly overlaps with the lower end portion of the guidance flow path 605. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed down the guidance flow path 605 can easily proceed to the guidance flow path 607.

The sphere that has advanced to the induction flow path 607 is blocked from flowing down by the storage valve 607a and stops at the upper part of the storage valve 607a (the sphere is stored). Then, when the ball is stopped (the ball is stored) at the upper part of the storage valve 607a and another ball newly flows down the induction flow path 605, the ball newly flows down the guidance flow path 605. The spheres that have come in contact (interference) with the spheres stored on the storage valve 607a. Due to this contact (interference), the trajectory (flowing direction) of the sphere newly flowing down the induction flow path 605 changes.

Since the guide flow path 607 is provided slightly to the right of the guide flow path 605 (see FIG. 9A), the sphere stored on the storage valve 607a is newly provided in the guide flow path 605. In most cases, it stops on the right side of the ball that flows down. Therefore, the sphere newly flowing down the induction flow path 605 collides with the left side of the sphere stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a, and thus repels the left side in the front view. Therefore, the sphere newly flowing down the guidance flow path 605 proceeds to the guidance flow path 606 provided on the left side of the front view. As described above, most of the balls flowing down the induction flow path 606 enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a relatively small number of winning balls (three prize balls). That is, in a state where the storage valve 607a protrudes to the front side of the front view and the ball cannot flow down the induction flow path 607 (the state where the guidance flow path 607 is closed), most of the balls that have entered the storage device 600 are general. Enter the winning opening (small value winning opening) 601.

On the other hand, when the storage valve 607a is buried in the back side of the front view (see FIG. 9B), there is nothing to prevent the flow of the sphere that has advanced to the guidance flow path 607, so that the guidance flow path 607 The ball that has progressed to the ball flows down the induction flow path 607 as it is, and enters the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. As described above, the general winning slot (high value winning slot) 602 is a winning slot with a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out (15), so there are many merits for the player to win a prize.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the ball can flow down the induction flow path 607 when a big hit occurs (see FIG. 9B). Therefore, in the special game state, by hitting the ball to the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a by hitting the right, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained and the ball is ejected by hitting the right. A prize ball can be obtained by a part of the ball winning a prize in the general prize opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the storage device 600. As a result, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one special game state (big hit state) can be increased, so that the player's merit by becoming a big hit can be enhanced. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game more enjoyably to be a big hit, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as described above, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, which has a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out, is closed by the storage valve 607a and relatively paid out. The ball is set in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a small number of winning balls. That is, in a state other than the special game state, there is little merit of letting the ball enter the storage device 600. Therefore, even in a state other than the special game state, the storage device 600 is always aimed at to receive a large amount of payout. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the game method.

In the present embodiment, the ball flowing down the induction flow path 606 enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 and the ball flowing down the induction flow path 607 enters the general winning opening 602. It is configured to do, but is not limited to this. For example, a known crune means provided with a plurality of winning openings is provided on the downstream side of each induction flow path, and different prize balls are paid out according to the winning openings to be entered. May be good. As a result, even if the guide flow path 606 flows down, a large number of prize balls can be obtained by entering the prize balls into the prize opening having a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out. Therefore, the player can be interestedly watched until the ball that has entered the storage device 600 enters any of the winning openings. Therefore, when the ball enters the storage device 600, the player can be more entertained.

In the present embodiment, the induction flow path 607 is blocked by the storage valve 607a so that the sphere can be stored in the middle of the induction flow path 607. For example, the induction flow path is provided by using an electromagnet or the like. It may be configured to store the sphere in the middle of 607. That is, an electromagnet is embedded in the inner wall portion of the induction flow path 607, and the electromagnet is magnetized by energizing the electromagnet in a state other than the special gaming state (during the jackpot state). As a result, the sphere that first flows into the induction flow path 607 can be attracted to the location where the electromagnet is provided, and the flow of the sphere can be stopped (the sphere is stored at the position of the electromagnet). With this configuration, the space for burying the storage valve 607a can be reduced. Therefore, the storage device 600 can be made more compact.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of balls stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a is one, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more balls may be stored. Further, when a plurality of spheres are stored, they may be stored in the vertical direction or may be stored side by side.

In the present embodiment, the out opening is provided inside the storage device 600, but instead of the out opening, a winning opening for paying out the prize balls may be provided. In addition, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter each winning opening may be different. More specifically, for example, 6 prize balls are provided in place of the out port 603a, 10 prize balls are provided in place of the out port 603b, and 10 prize balls are provided in place of the out port 603c. May be provided with 12 winning openings. This makes it possible to observe more interestingly when the ball flows down the guide flow path 606 and to which winning opening the ball enters the guide flow path 607. Further, a member such as a nail that can change the flow direction of the ball may be provided downstream of the guide flow path 606 or the guide flow path 607 so that the winning openings for any of the balls will be more random. .. As a result, when the ball flows into the storage device 600, the whereabouts of the ball can be observed more interestingly until the ball enters one of the winning openings. In addition, by providing a nail or the like, a clerk in the hall can set an entrance for the ball to easily enter. Therefore, the ball ejection rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted on the hall side.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11, a route when the player ejects the ball to the right side of the game board 13 (when the ball is hit to the right) will be described. First, FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a portion of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 on the upstream side of the storage device 600. As shown in FIG. 10, the flow path (path) on the right side of the game board 13 is provided with a normal ball entry port 67 above the flow path. As described above, when the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, a lottery for the normal symbol is executed. Then, when the normal symbol is hit, the second symbol display device 83 displays the “◯” symbol indicating the hit of the normal symbol after the variable effect for showing the lottery result of the normal symbol is executed. Then, based on the fact that the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 provided downstream of the normal entry port 67 It is released for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds x 1 time or 1 second x 2 times). While the electric accessory 640 is open, the right-handed ball can easily enter the second entry port 640. As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening period of the electric accessory is lengthened. 2 It becomes easy for the ball to enter the ball entry port 640. Therefore, by executing right-handed hitting, it is possible to receive a lottery of special symbols without reducing the number of balls.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11, a portion of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 on the downstream side of the second entry port 640 will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, a storage device 600 is provided downstream of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Further, a first variable winning device 65 is provided on the downstream side of the entrance of the storage device 600, and a second variable winning device 650 is provided on the downstream side of the first variable winning device 65. (See FIG. 11). That is, among the balls that have flowed downstream of the path (flow path) on the right side due to the player's right-handed strike, the balls that have flowed downstream without flowing into (entering) the storage device 600 are the first. 1 Flows down in the direction of the variable winning device 65. Further, the ball that flows down in the direction of the first variable winning device 65 and does not enter the first specific winning opening 65a flows down in the direction of the second variable winning device 650.

In this way, the player can make the ball flow down in the direction of the storage device 600, the first variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 650 simply by hitting the right side. Therefore, in the special gaming state (big hit state), the player can put the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a simply by hitting the right, and a large amount of balls can be inserted. You can win a prize ball. Further, a part of the balls launched aiming at the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a enters the storage device 600. Then, as described above, in the special game state (big hit state), most of the balls that have entered the storage device 600 enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 (see FIG. 9B). ), The player can win more prize balls during the special game state. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game more enjoyably to be a big hit, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, specific operations of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 16. First, FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650.

As shown in FIG. 12A, the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be openable toward the front side of the front view. When the first specific winning opening 65a is opened, the game ball flowing down the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 can enter the first specific winning opening 65a. As described above, the first specific winning opening 65a has 10 balls or until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds elapses) in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds of the special gaming state (big hit state). It will be released (until you win a prize). Then, when a ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a, 15 prize balls are paid out for each ball entered. Therefore, the player can win a large number of prize balls.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12B, the second specific winning opening 650 of the second variable winning device 650 can be buried inside the game board 13 by sliding toward the back side of the front view. It is configured to be possible. As a result, the upper portion of the second variable winning device 650 is opened, and the game ball flowing down the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 can enter the ball. As described above, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won) in 12 rounds of the special gaming state (big hit state). Then, when a ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a, 15 prize balls are paid out for each ball entered. Therefore, the player can win a large number of prize balls.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the operation of the ball that has flowed down the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 by right-handed strike and has reached the first specific winning opening 65a will be described. First, FIG. 13A is a diagram when the ball reaches the first specific winning opening 65a in a state where the first specific winning opening 65a is closed.

As shown in FIG. 13A, when the ball reaches the first specific winning opening 65a with the first specific winning opening 65a closed, the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, it falls into the space on the front side of the first specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 13A). Then, the ball that has fallen toward the front side of the first specific winning opening 65a flows down the flow path provided below the first specific winning opening 65a. Since the flow path below the first specific winning opening 65a is inclined in the direction of the second specific winning opening 650a, the ball flows down in the direction of the second specific winning opening 650a.

On the other hand, when the ball reaches the first specific winning opening 65a with the first specific winning opening 65a open, as shown in FIG. 13B, the ball is on the extension line of the flow path into which the ball has flowed down. 1 The opening portion of the specific winning opening 65a is located. Therefore, the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a. As shown in FIG. 13B, a ball discharge port 65c for discharging the ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is provided inside the first variable winning device 65. By entering the ball outlet 65c, the winning of the ball is detected and the winning ball is paid out, and the ball entering the inside of the first variable winning device 65 from the first specific winning opening 65a. Can be discharged. Since the bottom surface portion 65b of the first variable winning device 65 is inclined in the direction of the ball ejection port 65c, all the balls that have entered the first specific winning opening 65a enter the ball ejection port 65c. You can make it a ball. Therefore, all the balls can be reliably discharged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the operation of the ball that has flowed down the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 by right-handed strike and reached the second specific winning opening 650a will be described. First, FIG. 14A is a diagram when the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a in a state where the second specific winning opening 650a is closed.

As shown in FIG. 14A, when the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a with the second specific winning opening 650a closed, the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, it flows down the upper part of the second specific winning opening 650a and falls to the left side of the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 14A). Then, the ball that has fallen to the left side of the second specific winning opening 650a flows down to the out opening 66 (see FIG. 2) provided on the left side of the second specific winning opening 650.

On the other hand, when the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a with the second specific winning opening 650a open, as shown in FIG. 14B, the ball is on the extension line of the flow path into which the ball has flowed down. 2 The opening portion of the specific winning opening 650a is located. Therefore, the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. As shown in FIG. 14B, a ball discharge port 650c for discharging the ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is provided inside the second variable winning device 650. By entering the ball outlet 650c, the winning of the ball is detected and the winning ball is paid out, and the ball entering the inside of the second variable winning device 650 from the second specific winning opening 650a. Can be discharged. Since the bottom surface portion 650b of the second variable winning device 650 is inclined in the direction of the ball ejection port 650c, all the balls that have entered the second specific winning opening 650a are inserted into the ball ejection port 650c. You can make it a ball. Therefore, all the balls can be reliably discharged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the structure downstream of the ball discharge port 650c of the second variable winning device 650 will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the ball enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 654 provided inside the second variable winning device 650 in the special gaming state (big hit state), the ball enters the ball. It is configured to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. The probabilistic entry ball port 654 is provided in one of the two flow paths (induction flow path 652 and guidance flow path 653) provided downstream of the ball discharge port 650c (induction flow path 652). Has been done. Further, at the upper ends of the two flow paths, a flow path switching valve 650d for setting a flow path through which the ball flows is provided. The flow path switching valve 650d is provided to close one of the two flow paths to prevent the ball from advancing, and to open the other flow path to allow the ball to advance. Has been done. The flow path switching valve 650d can be rotated around the switching shaft 650e as a rotation shaft by driving the flow path solenoid 611 (see FIG. 17), and in the 12th round of the jackpot, depending on the elapsed time. The arrangement can be switched.

15 (a) and 15 (b) are views showing the operation of the sphere for each arrangement of the flow path switching valve 650d. First, FIG. 15A is a diagram showing a case where the flow path switching valve 650d is arranged to close the induction flow path 652. In the case of the arrangement in which the induction flow path 652 is closed, the ball that has entered the ball discharge port 650c cannot proceed to the induction flow path 652 because it is blocked by the flow path switching valve 650d. Therefore, the sphere advances to the induction flow path 653 (see FIG. 15 (a)). A ball entry port 655 is usually provided downstream of the induction flow path 653. That is, during the arrangement shown in FIG. 15A, the ball cannot enter the probability variation entry ball opening 654. In this embodiment, the flow path switching valve 650d is configured to have the arrangement shown in FIG. 15A by turning off the flow path solenoid 611.

On the other hand, FIG. 15B is a diagram showing a case where the flow path switching valve 650d is arranged to close the induction flow path 653. This arrangement can be realized by turning on (exciting) the flow path solenoid 611. In the case of the arrangement in which the induction flow path 653 is closed, the ball entering the ball discharge port 650c can proceed to the induction flow path 652 without being blocked by the flow path switching valve 650d. Therefore, the ball advances to the induction flow path 653 and enters the probabilistic entry ball port 654 provided downstream thereof.

When the ball enters the probability-changing ball opening 654, it is set to shift to the probability-changing state of the special symbol at the end of the jackpot (at the start of the ending effect). Further, when the twelfth round in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened is completed, a suggestion effect for suggesting the gaming state after the end of the big hit to the player is executed in the subsequent rounds. That is, if the ball enters the probability-changing ball opening 654 in the 12th round, the display effect suggesting that the ball enters the probability-changing state of the special symbol in the 13th to 15th rounds is the third symbol display device 81. Is executed in. On the other hand, if the ball does not enter the probability variation entrance 654 in the 12th round, the display effect suggesting that the normal symbol shifts to the time saving state in the 13th to 15th rounds is the third symbol display device 81. Is executed in. In this way, by setting the round in which the large 2 specific winning opening 650a is opened as the 12th round, a sufficient period for executing the suggestion effect suggesting the gaming state after the end of the big hit is secured in the remaining rounds of the big hit. be able to.

As described above, in the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, the second variable winning device 650 is provided downstream from the entrance of the storage device 600, so that the ball is moved to the storage device 600. The easier it is for the ball to flow in, the harder it is for the ball to reach the second variable winning device 650. If it becomes difficult for the ball to reach the second variable winning device 650, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the probability variation entrance 654 in the 12 rounds of the jackpot B. On the contrary, the more difficult it is for the ball to flow into the storage device 600, the easier it is for the ball to reach the second variable winning device 650. Become. Therefore, by adjusting the ease with which the ball can flow into the storage device 600, the rate of ball entering the probabilistic entry ball port 654 can be changed. Here, as a method of adjusting the ease of inflow to the storage device 600, for example, adjusting a nail (see FIG. 11) provided at the inlet portion of the storage device 600 can be mentioned. That is, the more the two nails provided at the inlet portion of the storage device 600 are adjusted so as to be closer to each other, the more difficult it is for the ball to pass between these two nails, and therefore the more difficult it is for the ball to flow into the storage device 600. .. Therefore, in the 12th round of the jackpot B, the ball can easily enter the probability-changing ball opening 654, so that it is possible to easily shift to the probability-changing state of the special symbol. On the other hand, the more the two nails provided at the inlet portion of the storage device 600 are adjusted so as to be separated from each other, the easier it is for the ball to pass between these two nails, so that the ball easily flows into the storage device 600. .. Therefore, in the 12th round of the jackpot B, the ball easily flows into the probabilistic ball opening 654, so that it is difficult to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol. Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided at the entrance portion of the storage device 600, the specifications of the pachinko machine 10 (the ratio of the probable change state of the special symbol) can be changed, so that the pachinko machine can be changed according to the business policy of each hall. The specifications of the machine 10 can be changed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the operation of the flow path switching valve 650d has the same pattern regardless of the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a is different between the jackpot A and the jackpot B. As a result, the jackpot B is configured to be easier for the ball to enter the probability variation entrance 654 in the special gaming state (big hit state) than the jackpot A. The relationship between the switching pattern of the flow path switching valve 650d and the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 16A is a diagram showing a time change between the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the flow path switching valve 650d in the twelfth round of the jackpot A. The graph on the upper side of FIG. 16A shows the time change (whether it is in the open state or the closed state) of the second specific winning opening (second large open opening) 650a, and is shown in FIG. 16A. The lower figure is a diagram showing the time change of the flow path switching valve 650d (whether the induction flow path 652 on the downstream left side of the ball discharge port 650c is open or the guidance flow path 653 on the right side is open). is there.

As shown in FIG. 16A, when the twelfth round is started, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the predetermined time When (for example, 0.2 seconds) elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. Then, the closed state is maintained until 7 seconds have elapsed from the start of the 12th round, and the open state is set based on the elapse of 7 seconds. This open state continues until the end of the 12th round. Specifically, 10 balls enter the 2nd specified winning opening (2nd large opening opening) 650a, or the open state is set until 30 seconds have passed from the start of the 12th round. Will be done. Then, when the 12th round is completed, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is closed. This closed state continues until the special game state (big hit state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big hits are reached.

Further, in the 12th round of the jackpot A, the flow path switching valve 650d is set so that the guide flow path 653 provided on the right side thereof is closed and the ball can flow down the guide flow path 652 on the left side (FIG. 15). See (b)). This state continues for 6.5 seconds after the start of the 12th round, and the flow path switching valve 650d switches in the opposite direction based on the elapse of 6.5 seconds. That is, the induction flow path 652 is closed by the flow path switching valve 650d, and is set in a state in which a ball can flow down the induction flow path 653 provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d (see FIG. 15A). Since this switching operation is completed in a period of 0.5 seconds or less, the flow path can be switched before the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened.

Then, after the direction of the flow path switching valve 650d is switched, the state (a state in which a ball can flow down the induction flow path 653) is maintained. The state in which the ball can flow down the induction flow path 653 becomes the next big hit and continues until the end of the 11th round. Then, based on the end of the 11th round and the interval period of 3 seconds, the ball is set in a state where the ball can flow down the induction flow path 652 (the flow path solenoid 611 is turned on). That is, during most of the period when the player is playing the game, the ball can pass through the induction flow path 653 provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d, and is provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d. The state in which the ball can pass through the induction flow path 652 is limited from the interval period (3 seconds) set before the start of the 12th round to 6.5 seconds after the start of the 12th round. Only the period (9.5 seconds). Therefore, even if a fraudulent act of causing the ball to enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is performed in a game other than the 12th round of the special game state, the ball enters the probabilistic entry opening 654. Since it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the illegal acquisition of the probabilistic state of the special symbol.

The timing for switching the flow path switching valve 650d is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to switch to the open state of the induction flow path 652 at the start of the 12th round, or in the middle of the interval period set after the end of the 11th round (for example, after the interval starts). It may be configured to switch (after 0.5 seconds have passed). As a result, the period during which the guide flow path 652 is opened can be limited to a shorter period, so that the ball is illegally entered into the second variable winning device 650 while the second specific winning opening 650a is closed. Even if it is allowed to do so, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball from entering the probabilistic entry ball opening 654. That is, cheating can be prevented.

In this way, in the 12th round of the jackpot A, the period during which the induction flow path 652 provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d is open and the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a are open. The opening pattern of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is set so that the period is almost non-overlapping (overlapping only for 0.2 seconds immediately after the start of the 12th round). Therefore, in most cases where the jackpot A is reached, the ball does not enter the probability change ball opening 654 during the special game state (during the jackpot), so that it is difficult to set the special symbol to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot.

The reason why the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened in 0.2 seconds immediately after the start of the 12th round is to make it difficult to understand that it is a big hit A immediately after the start of the 12th round. Is. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 16B, but in the jackpot B where it is easy to enter the ball into the probability variation entry opening 654, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) immediately after the start of the 12th round. ) 650a is opened. Therefore, by sharing the operation of the second specific winning opening (second big opening) 650a immediately after the start of the 12th round between the jackpot A and the jackpot B, it is expected that the jackpot this time will be the jackpot B. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16B, the time change between the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the flow path switching valve 650d in the 12th round of the jackpot B will be described. The upper graph of FIG. 16 (b) shows the time change (whether it is in the open state or the closed state) of the second specific winning opening (second large open opening) 650a, and is shown in FIG. 16 (b). The lower figure is a diagram showing the time change of the flow path switching valve 650d (whether the induction flow path 652 on the downstream left side of the ball discharge port 650c is open or the guidance flow path 653 on the right side is open). is there.

As shown in FIG. 16B, when the twelfth round is started, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is set to the open state. Then, the open state is maintained until 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the 12th round, and the closed state is set based on the elapse of 5 seconds. Even if 10 balls enter the 2nd specified winning opening (2nd large opening) 650a before 5 seconds have elapsed, the 2nd specified winning opening (2nd large opening) 650a will still be used. It will be closed. This closed state continues until the special game state (big hit state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big hits are reached.

Further, as described above, in the 12th round of the jackpot B, the flow path switching valve 650d is set to perform the same operation as the jackpot A. That is, based on the start of the interval period set at the end of the 11th round, the induction flow path 653 provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d is closed so that the ball can flow down the guidance flow path 652 on the left side. (See FIG. 15 (b)). Then, when 6.5 seconds have passed since the start of the 12th round, the flow path switching valve 650d is switched in the opposite direction. That is, the induction flow path 652 is closed by the flow path switching valve 650d, and is set in a state in which a ball can flow down the induction flow path 653 provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d (see FIG. 15A). Then, after the direction of the flow path switching valve 650d is switched, the state (a state in which a ball can flow down the induction flow path 653) is maintained.

In this way, in the 12th round of the jackpot B, the period during which the induction flow path 652 provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d is open and the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a are open. The opening pattern of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is set so that the period overlaps with the period for a maximum of 5 seconds. Therefore, in most cases where the jackpot is B, the ball can be entered into the probability change ball opening 654 during the special game state (during the jackpot), so that the ball is set to the probability change state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. It will be easier.

The opening pattern of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is not limited to this, and the pattern is such that the ball can easily enter the probabilistic entry ball opening 654 and the probabilistic entry ball opening 654. If it is possible to set a pattern in which the ball is difficult to enter, it may be arbitrarily determined. Further, the switching pattern of the flow path switching valve 650d is not limited to the embodiment of the present embodiment, and can be arbitrarily determined. For example, the flow path switching valve 650d is set so that the ball can flow down the induction flow path 653 at the start of the 12th round (see FIG. 15A), and a predetermined time (for example, 6. The flow path switching valve 650d may be set so that the ball can flow down the induction flow path 652 after 5 seconds) (see FIG. 15B).

Further, the number of rounds for opening the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is not limited to the twelfth round, and may be set to any round. Further, the second specific winning opening 650a may be opened in a plurality of rounds. For example, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a may be opened in the first round and the fifteenth round. May be set to. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of the ball entering the probability-changing ball opening 654, so that it is possible to more easily enter the probability-changing state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot B. Therefore, even though the jackpot B is won, the ball cannot be entered into the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a, which lowers the player's motivation for the game. It can be prevented (suppressed).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. In the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided, and the certificate stamp, etc. attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first ball entry port 64.

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 601, 602, 650a, and the out openings 603a to 603c are guided through the out openings 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box It is cut to the cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 17) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 17). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device. Execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18A, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 has a random number table 202a per first, a type selection table 202b per first, and a random number table 202c per second as a part of the fixed value data described above. , And the variation pattern selection table 202d is stored at least.

The first hit random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter C1 described later is stored. The details will be described later together with the description of the first random number counter C1, but the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the starting prize is any determination value specified in the first random number table 202a. If it matches, it is determined that it is a big hit of a special symbol.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 18B) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is each jackpot type. , And the type of entrance that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the first entry port 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49". Is defined in association with the jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 18B). As described above, in the case of a jackpot A, most of the period during which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened in the 12th round is the induction provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d. It is configured so that the flow path 653 is open (see FIG. 16A). Therefore, it becomes difficult to allow the ball to flow down to the induction flow path 652 provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d, so that the ball is moved to the probability change entry ball port 654 provided downstream of the induction flow path 652. It becomes difficult to enter the ball. That is, when the jackpot A is reached, it becomes difficult to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends.

Further, the jackpot B is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99" (see 202b2 in FIG. 18B). As described above, when the jackpot B is obtained, the induction provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d for the entire period during which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened in the 12th round It is configured so as to overlap with the period during which the flow path 652 is open (see FIG. 16B). Therefore, the flow path switching valve 650d can be obtained by simply inserting the ball into the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a while the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is open. The sphere can flow down into the induction flow path 652 provided on the left side of the. Then, as described above, a probability variation entry ball port 654 is provided downstream of the induction flow path 652. Therefore, when the jackpot B is reached, it becomes easy to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends.

On the other hand, if a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entry port 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19". The jackpot A is associated and defined (see 202b3 in FIG. 18B). Further, the jackpot B is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20 to 99". That is, the number of determination values that result in a jackpot B is larger when a jackpot is achieved by the special symbol 2 lottery than in the case where a jackpot is achieved by the special symbol 1 lottery. Therefore, when a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2, it is more likely to be a big hit B.

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit is increased. It is set to be longer (1 second x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easy to put the ball into the second ball entry port 640, so that the lottery of the special symbol 2 becomes easy to be performed. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, the probabilistic state of the special symbol that is likely to be a jackpot of the special symbol and is likely to be the jackpot B when the jackpot is reached, and the probabilistic change of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot Since the jackpot B, which tends to be in a state, is likely to be repeated, it becomes easy for the player to win a large number of prize balls. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 18C) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5-28" is defined as a determination value for hitting the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 18 (c)). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "5-204" is defined as a determination value for hitting the normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 18 (c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired based on the passage of the ball through the normal entry port 67 and the second random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol is used. It is judged whether or not it is a hit.

The variation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 19, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 34). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, a special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a and a second ball entry corresponding to winning a prize in the first ball opening 64 consisting of one execution area and four hold areas (holds 1st to 4th areas). A special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to a prize in the mouth 640 is provided, and each of these areas has a timing for entering the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640. In addition, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored, respectively. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and a ball is usually used in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the ball entry port (through gate) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), reaches the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 34).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set. When it matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit set by the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined as the big hit of the special symbol. Further, the first random number table 202a is used for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special) in which the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is higher than that of the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for the period in which the symbol is in a high probability state), and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots included in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers to be big hits different in this way, the probability of big hits is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, in the case of the probability variation state of the special symbol, which of "0 to 9" is the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. If it is any one of "0 to 9", it is determined that it is a big hit. The first hit random number counter C1 has 400 possible values of "0 to 399", and the judgment value that becomes a big hit is 10 of "0 to 9". The probability of becoming is 1/40 (10/400). Further, in the case of the low probability state of the special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "200", and if it is "200", it is determined to be a big hit. Of the 400 possible values of the first random number counter C1 of "0 to 399", only one of the judgment values that becomes a big hit is "200", so the special symbol is placed in the low probability state of the special symbol. The probability of winning a jackpot is 1/400.

In this embodiment, a random number value that is a big hit stored in the first hit random number table for low probability and a random number value that is a big hit stored in the first random number table for high probability. So, the random number values that are the jackpots for each are set so that the values do not overlap. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random value for the jackpot regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random number value may be input from the outside and the jackpot may be easily assigned illegally. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random value that becomes the jackpot is changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 is updated at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a.

Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol. If it is a random number that is out of order, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out of order.

On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on 37 is the one at the time of the big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 1, and the big hit type when the random number value is any of "0 to 49" in the first hit type counter C2 is "big hit A". Further, the lottery of the special symbol 1 results in a big hit, and when the random number value is any of "50 to 99", the big hit type is "big hit B". Further, a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2, and the big hit type when the random number value is any of "0 to 19" in the first hit type counter C2 is "big hit A". Further, a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2, and the big hit type when the random number value is any of "20 to 99" is "big hit B".

In this embodiment, the number of types of jackpots is two, but the number of jackpots is not limited to one, and one type may be used, or two or more types may be provided. Further, it is configured so that the same jackpot type is selected with the same value of the first hit type counter C2 in the case where the big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the case where the jackpot is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2. You may. With this configuration, the amount of data in the type selection table 202b per first can be reduced, so that the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 34) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. As described above, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d storing the random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. ing.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, for example, "disengagement (for a long time)", "disengagement (for a short time)", "disengagement normal reach", and "disengagement super reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns for disengagement. , Various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are specified as fluctuation patterns for jackpots. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type).

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67. , It is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 18C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number to be the hit set by the second hit random number table 202c, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. Further, the second hit random number table 202c is used for the low probability time of the normal symbol (the period during which the normal symbol is in the normal state) (see 202c1 in FIG. 18C), and the hit of the normal symbol from the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for high probability (the period in which the normal symbol is in the time-shortened state and the period in which the special symbol is in the probabilistic state) (see 202c2 in FIG. 18 (c)), and is included in each. The number of random numbers that will be big hits is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be hit different, the probability of winning between the low probability of the normal symbol (normal state of the normal symbol) and the high probability of the normal symbol (time saving state of the normal symbol). Is changed.

As shown in FIG. 18 (c), when the probability of the normal symbol is low, there are 24 random values that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "5-28" (202c1 in FIG. 18 (c). reference). As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become a jackpot is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is released only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits, but it is released. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol (during the time reduction of a normal symbol and during the probability change of a special symbol), there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5-204". .. These random number values are stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability (see 202c2 in FIG. 18C). As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is shortened. Since it becomes very long as "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 640. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is "1 second x 2 times". However, the opening time and the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 34).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 19, the RAM 203 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 34) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 33) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Here, the details of various flags and counters stored in the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 20, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol 2 reserved ball. Number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passing counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, probability variation effective flag 203o , Probability variation effective timer 203p, discharge number counter 203q, time saving medium counter 203r, and other memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area), and each of these areas has a first entry port. Each value of the first random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on winning 64 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting prize), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th area on hold), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the reserved area (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that the counter values acquired for winning the second entry port 640 are stored. , Other configurations are the same, so detailed description will be omitted.

Similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Area) and. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, and the acquired data is obtained from the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the vacant areas, the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 202b, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other hold areas are won. The shift process is performed to pack the data of the above into the holding area which is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d displays fluctuations (first symbol) of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry of balls into the first entry port 64 (starting prize). 3 This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the symbol display device 81 (variable display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. 1 is added (see S404 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S210 in FIG. 26).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variation display in the special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 26 and S405 in FIG. 28). ). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 holds the fluctuation display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual reserved ball in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol (reserved symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in that the number of reserved balls is stored by winning a prize in the second entry port 640. Since it is only different, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f maximizes the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entry port 67. It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See S704 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 30).

When the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, if the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the fluctuation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the normal symbol entry port 67, if the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c (FIG. 31). S703: No).

The probability change flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is the probability change state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol). When the probability change flag 203g is set to on, it indicates that the game state is the probability change state of the special symbol, and when it is off, it indicates that the special symbol is in the low probability state. In the present embodiment, when the probability variation setting flag 203h, which will be described later, is set to on at the end of the jackpot game, the probability variation flag 203g is set to on (see S1304 in FIG. 37). Further, the probability variation flag 203g becomes a big hit by a lottery of a special symbol, and is set to off when the start of the big hit is set. In the initialized state (that is, the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 10 while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed), the probability change flag 203g is reset to off, and a normal power off occurs. If this happens, it is configured to back up the state immediately before the power cutoff occurs.

The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probabilistic gaming state is determined by whether or not the game ball enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 654 during the special gaming state (big hit state). .. When a game ball enters the probability variation entry ball opening 654, the entry ball is detected by a probability variation switch (not shown), and the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to off based on the probability variation flag 203g being set to on (see S1305 in FIG. 37). The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). In addition, it is set to off in the initialized state.

When the probability change setting flag 202h is set to on when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the probability change switch has been passed before the power is cut off, and when it is determined that the probability change switch has been passed, the probability change setting flag 203h is determined. May be officially set to on and configured to return. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the probability change switch has been passed before the power supply is cut off by whether or not the probability change passage counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value larger than 0. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the damage on the amusement store side by determining fraud such that only the probability change setting flag 203h is turned on and the power is turned on again when the power is turned off. it can.

The probability variation passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability variation switch in one round (in the present embodiment, the twelfth round of the jackpot) during the jackpot state. It is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have flowed into the inside of the second variable winning device 650 have been discharged from the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203q described later. The probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented and updated one by one when passing through the probability variation switch (S1411 in FIG. 38). Further, after executing the process of checking whether or not the number of game balls flowing into the second variable winning device 650 matches the number of ejected balls, the initial value is reset to "0" (FIG. 39). S1511). The value of the probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, its value is reset to 0.

The winning number counter 203j is a first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 and a second specific winning opening (second) of the second variable winning device 650 in each round in the jackpot game. This is a counter for counting the number of balls that have entered the large opening) 650a. Specifically, based on the fact that the winning sensors (not shown) provided in the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a respectively detect the entry of a ball, the ball is added and updated one by one. (S1403 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won in the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a (value of the winning number counter 203j). ) And the number of discharged items (the total value of the number of discharged counters 203q and the probability variation passing counter 203i) are determined, and then the initial value is reset to “0”. The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is reset to 0.

As described above, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, only the first specific winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a is opened, so that the winning number counter 203j is substantially in each of the above rounds. The number of balls that have entered the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is counted. On the other hand, in the 12th round, only the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is opened, so that in the 12th round, the winning number counter 203j is substantially the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening). The number of balls that have entered the large opening) 650a will be counted.

In the present embodiment, a prize is won when it is detected that a ball has entered either the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a. Although it is configured to add 1 to the value of the number counter 203j, it is entered at the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, respectively. A separate counter may be provided to count the number of balls that have been balled.

The operation counter 203k is a counter for measuring (counting) the elapsed time since the induction flow path 652 provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d is set to the open state (see FIG. 15B). .. That is, the elapsed time from the time when the flow path solenoid 611 is set to ON and the ball is set to the state where the ball can enter the probability variation entry port 654 is timed (counted) by the operation counter 203k. In the pachinko machine 10, the flow path switching valve 650d rotates clockwise with the switching shaft 650e as the rotation axis by turning on (exciting) the flow path solenoid 611 based on the completion of 11 rounds of the jackpot. The induction flow path 652 is opened.

A counter value corresponding to a period during which the flow path solenoid 611 is turned on (excited) is set in the operation counter 203k at the end of the eleventh round. That is, the counter value corresponding to the interval period of 3 seconds before the start of the 12th round and 6.5 seconds after the start of the 12th round for a total of 9.5 seconds is set. On the other hand, in the process of S1409 of the winning process (see FIG. 38) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main control device 110, the value is subtracted by 1 and updated. Further, the flow path solenoid 611 is set to off based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203k is 0. The value of this operation counter 203k is backed up even if the power supply is cut off. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is reset to the initial value of 0.

The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag indicating that the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a are closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is open in one round. Indicates that it has been set to a closed state. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203n, which will be described later, is added and updated one by one (see S1505 in FIG. 39). The remaining ball timer 203n is a counter for determining the time after the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. It is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for ejecting the game ball flowing into the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 has elapsed.

The remaining ball timer 203n is used when the preset 1 round is completed and the 1st specific winning opening (1st large opening) 65a is closed (1st to 11th rounds, 13th to 15th rounds), or the second. When the specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed (12 rounds), it is necessary for the game ball that has flowed into the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 to be discharged. It is a counter for determining whether time has passed. In the present embodiment, since the time required for the game ball winning the first variable winning device 81 to be discharged is 2 seconds, it corresponds to 3 seconds (2 seconds + 1 second) including a 1 second margin. The counter value is set as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203n. When the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is updated and the value reaches the upper limit value (3 seconds), the first variable winning device 65 (1 to 11 rounds and 13 to 15 rounds) or the second variable winning device 650 It is determined whether or not the number of winnings in (12 rounds) and the number of dischargeds match (S1507 in FIG. 39). Then, when it is determined that the number of winnings and the number of dischargings do not match, an error command is set and a notification to that effect is given. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that ball clogging has occurred inside the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650. Therefore, in the 12 rounds of the jackpot, the ball is left in the second variable winning device 650, and an impact or the like is given at the start timing of the next 12 rounds of the jackpot to allow the ball to enter the probabilistic entry ball opening 654. Cheating can be suppressed.

If the number of prizes and the number of discharges do not match, a dedicated flag is set to on, and if the flag is on, the probability change is set even if the ball enters the probability change entrance 654. The configuration may be such that the flag 203h is not set to on. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the probabilistic gaming state from being illegally given.

Further, in the present embodiment, either the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is switched from the open state to the closed state. When it was detected, the counter value was started to be updated by the remaining ball timer 203n, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, separate counters may be provided for the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a.

The probability change effective flag 203o is a flag for determining whether or not the ball entry is valid when the game ball enters the probability variation entry port 654 after the flow path solenoid 611 is set to off. Is. When the probability variation effective flag 203o is set to ON, the ball flowing into the induction flow path 652 (see FIG. 15B) is a probability variation entry ball based on the flow path solenoid 611 being ON. It shows that it is less than the time required to enter the mouth 654. That is, it is shown that the entry into the probability variation entry slot 654 is a normal operation.

The probability change effective timer 203p is a counter for counting the time after the above-mentioned probability change effective flag 203o is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 611 is turned off by the probability variation effective timer 203p, it is possible to determine the period required for normally entering the probability variation entry ball port 654. In the present embodiment, the time required for the ball flowing into the induction flow path 652 to enter the probabilistic entry ball port 654 is 1 second. The upper limit of the probability variation effective timer 203p is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds including a margin of 0.2 seconds. If the ball enters the probability variation entrance 654 after this 1.2 seconds have passed, there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity has been performed, so the probability variation setting flag 203h is controlled so as not to be updated. ..

As a result, in a state where the flow path switching valve 650d closes the induction flow path 652 (a state in which the ball is not guided to the probability change entry ball port 654), the ball can be inserted into the probability change entry ball port 654 or the probability change entry ball. Damage caused by fraud such as pushing up the game ball with a piano wire or the like from the downstream of the mouth 654 to pass the probabilistic entry ball port 654, or erroneously detecting that the ball has entered the probabilistic entry ball port 654 by radio waves or the like. Can be suppressed.

The discharge number counter 203q is a counter for counting the number of balls discharged from the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 in one round. The first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are each provided with a ball discharge port switch (not shown) for detecting the discharge of balls. The discharge number counter 203q is incremented by 1 each time a ball discharge is detected by the ball discharge port switch (see S1503 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, after it is determined whether or not the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 matches the number of ejected balls, the value of the ejected number counter 203q is the initial value. Is reset to 0 (S1511 in FIG. 39).

The time saving medium counter 203r is a counter for counting the remaining time saving period (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) in the time saving state of the normal symbol. The time saving medium counter 203r is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot (see S1307 in FIG. 37). That is, in the present embodiment, if the probabilistic game state is not set after the jackpot game, the time saving state of the normal symbol 100 times is given.

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like are set (stored).

Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the content of the effect, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a and other various data and programs necessary for controlling the game.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (complete deviation, reach deviation, various reach, etc.) are set in counter values for variation pattern selection (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the hit / fail determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of fluctuation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the fluctuation time and the type of fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

Further, in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag 223e , A probability change state flag 223f, a time saving state counter 223g, a jackpot medium flag 223h, and an allowable time counter 223i are provided at least.

The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores prize information. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the lottery result of the reserved ball or the like can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 before the start of fluctuation.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. ), Which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variation display is added by entering the ball into the first entry port 64 (starting prize), or in the main control device 110, the variation display in the special symbol Is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1908 in FIG. 43). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 hold ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b, and also stores the special symbol 1 hold ball number after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the hold ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball for the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the numerical symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c stores the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110. Since it differs only in that it is performed, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1902 in FIG. 43), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 43). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1905 in FIG. 43), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2007 in FIG. 47). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The probability change state flag 223f is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the probability change state of the special symbol. When the probability change state flag 223f is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol, and when it is off, it indicates that the special symbol is in the low probability state. The probability change state flag 223f is updated according to the notification content of the state command output from the main control device 110 (see S1711 in FIG. 41 and S1910 in FIG. 43). Depending on the state of the probability change state flag 223f, it is determined whether or not the present is the probability change state of the special symbol, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 5 (a)) displayed in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, and the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5 (b)). Is determined whether or not to display.

The time saving state counter 223g is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the time saving state of the normal symbol. When the time saving state counter 223g is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and when it is off, it indicates that it is in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol. The time saving state counter 223g is updated according to the notification content of the state command output from the main control device 110 (see S1711 in FIG. 41 and S1910 in FIG. 43). Depending on the state of the time saving state counter 223g, it is determined whether or not the current time saving state is the normal symbol, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 5 (a)) displayed in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, and the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5 (b)). Is determined whether or not to display.

The jackpot middle flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a special gaming state (big hit state). If this jackpot flag 223h is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special gaming state (big hit state), and if it is off, it indicates a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state) (probability change state of special symbol, normal). Indicates that the symbol is in either the time-saving state or the normal state). The jackpot flag 223h is set to ON when an opening command is received from the main controller 110 (see S1914 in FIG. 43). That is, it is set to ON when the special game state (big hit state) is started. On the other hand, the jackpot middle flag 223h is set to off when an ending command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1917 in FIG. 43). That is, it is set to off when the special game state (big hit state) ends. Corresponding effects are set according to the state of the jackpot middle flag 223h. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 6 (a)) displayed in the special game state (big hit state), or the left-handed warning image (FIG. 7 (a)). Refer to) to determine whether to display.

In the permissible time counter 223i, the ball that has flowed into the induction flow path 606 or the induction flow path 607 immediately before switching the state of the storage valve 607a goes to either entry port (general winning opening 601 or general winning opening 602). It is a counter for counting the time until the ball enters (ball ejection time). By counting the ball brushing period, when a ball enters the general winning opening 601 or the general winning opening 602, it is more accurately determined whether or not the entry is a normal operation. be able to. The permissible time counter 233i is set with a counter value corresponding to 1 second each time an opening command or an ending command is received (see S1914 and S1917 in FIG. 43). Further, each time the variable display setting process (see FIG. 47), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 42), is executed, the value is subtracted by 1 (see S2015 in FIG. 47).

As described above, when the storage valve 607a is closed, a ball enters the general winning opening 602 provided downstream of the storage valve 607a, or when the storage valve 607a is opened, the ball enters the general winning opening 601. When the ball enters, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) is displayed. However, if the ball flows into the induction flow path 607 immediately before the storage valve 607a switches from the open state to the closed state, the ball enters the general winning opening 602 after the storage valve 607a switches to the closed state. May be done. Similarly, if a ball flows into the induction flow path 606 immediately before the storage valve 607a switches from the closed state to the open state, the ball enters the general winning opening 601 after the storage valve 607a switches to the open state. It may be a ball. In order to treat these as normal ball entry (not to display the warning image), in the present embodiment, when the state of the storage valve 607a is switched, the allowable time counter 233i is set to a predetermined period (1 second). Set the corresponding counter value. Then, until one second set as the counter value elapses, when the ball enters the general winning opening 601 or the general winning opening 602, it is determined that the operation is normal (the warning image is not displayed). It is configured as follows.

The winning number counter 223j is a counter for counting the number of times a ball has entered the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in a big hit. The value of the winning count counter 223j is reset to 0 at the start of the jackpot, and the value is 1 each time a winning information command corresponding to a ball entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is received at the jackpot. They are added one by one (see S1944 in FIG. 45). As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of times the ball has entered the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the special gaming state (big hit state) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 6 (a)). The winning number counter 223j is referred to in order to accurately update the number of winning balls displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 43) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 changes the display (variation) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the production) and the advance notice production.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power supply cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made available in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the reading thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data used in the control program (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S2202 in FIG. 49) executed after the boot process (see S2201 in FIG. 49) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 50B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry are entered. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image at power-on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuating effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2103 and S2104 in FIG. 48).

Here, the fluctuation image when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image as the third symbol display device. Display on 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays the main image when the power is turned on. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position when facing the screen and the fluctuation image of the "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the fluctuation period. It is displayed alternately and repeatedly in the middle. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the "○" symbol is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the "x" symbol is displayed after the variable effect is stopped. Display for a certain period of time.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first entrance ball 64 or the second entrance ball 640 is detected. In this case, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the power-on variation image is alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 as displayed in. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If an entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main symbol (third symbol), and for example, a city, the sea, the sky, or the like is displayed. A right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 5A) and the like are also stored in the rear image area 235c as a rear image.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when the variation effect is performed by the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the display is not performed.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a timing counter 233h, and an opening data transfer flag. It has at least 223i, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to round production, ending production, and demo production are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, which are normally closed, will be opened. It is a production, and the round production is a production for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player that the end of the special game state (big hit state) is notified to the player.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has passed since one variation effect was stopped. Therefore, the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is defined for each address. In addition, one or a plurality of information about the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or backs A to. Information that specifies whether to display a back image different from C is described. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage specified by the player as the drawing target. Also, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

The start address "0000H" of the display data table is described with "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 22) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, it is resident. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. (Corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 23). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. The Null data meaning that is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 23).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 23, in the example of FIG. 23). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 23, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 48) (see S2105 in FIG. 48). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S3705 in FIG. 59 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2401 in FIG. 50 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 50B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 50B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 50 (b) see S2409) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 51 to 55) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 56 to 58) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3601 in FIG. 59 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 59 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 60) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of the image drawing instruction for As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transferred data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later, which describes the instruction contents for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 50 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S3305 in FIG. 58) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 24) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 24, a back image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as (design). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing according to the filter specification information by the method specified by that information. After that, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image and the warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 creates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 50 (b). ) Is executed, the timekeeping counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3307 in FIG. 56). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S2102 in FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 231. It is said. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3813 in FIG. 60). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3814 in FIG. 60). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter, referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3902 in FIG. 61).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and displays the image with the drive signal for the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, the display process of displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 50B) is executed, it is performed (see S3902 in FIG. 61).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 25 to 39. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt processing, first, the reading processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 399, 99, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) to the first entry opening 64 or the second entry opening 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through due to the passage of the ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is executed. The gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through-gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31, respectively. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

Unless the special symbol is in the jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e (the number of hold counts N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 2 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted values in the RAM 223. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S213). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. (S208), and it is determined whether the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). If it is determined by the process of S209 that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S210). , The hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the process of S211 (S212), the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212), and the process shifts to S213.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (S214: No) has not elapsed, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. 27. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Be told. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is decided whether it will be a jackpot A or a jackpot B.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37. If it is a big hit B, the red LED is turned on, and if it is off, the green LED is turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S216). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S216: Yes), an opening scenario of a specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S217), and then the start of the jackpot is set (S218). The opening scenario specifically indicates the setting of the opening patterns of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a. That is, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, the first specific winning opening (first opening opening) 65a is opened for a predetermined period (until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won). In the 12th round, it is shown that the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is set to be opened in a pattern (see FIG. 16) according to the jackpot type. When the processing of S218 is completed, the notification counter corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S219), and this processing is completed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S216, if the result of the lottery this time is wrong (S216: No),
It is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203r is 1 or more (S220), and if it is determined that the value is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (S220: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving / medium counter 203r is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r is subtracted by 1 (S221), and this process is terminated.

Next, the special symbol variation start processing (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and is special with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area common to the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (win / fail judgment) for "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, first, the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , The stop type selection counter C3, and the stop type counter CN1 are acquired (S301).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302), and if it is on (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the value for high probability time are used. Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired from the first random number table 202a (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 10 random number values defined in the first random number table 202a one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers of "0 to 9" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and the value of the random number counter C1 per first matches the random number values that hit these. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

In the present embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 share the same judgment value as a big hit, but depending on whether the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the lottery for the special symbol 2 is used. It may be a different random value. With this configuration, the random number value determined to be out of order in the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the bias of the jackpot can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2 are set to the same number of judgment values to be big hits, but the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2 The number of judgment values that will be a big hit may be different. By configuring in this way, the probability of a jackpot can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is not on (that is, it is off) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability gaming state) of the special symbol. Based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first random number table 202a for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As a random number value that becomes a big hit of a special symbol, one of "200" is set, and when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the random number value that becomes this hit match, the big hit of the special symbol Is determined to be. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes). , A display mode at the time of a big hit indicating a big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the jackpot of two types of special symbols (big hit). It is determined what kind of jackpot is among A and jackpot B).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S308). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S308, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. As described above, the relationship between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 20d.

The fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d include, for example, "disengagement (for a long time)", "disengagement (for a short time)", "disengagement normal reach", and "disengagement normal reach" as fluctuation patterns for disengagement. Various types of "off-the-shelf super reach" and various types of "off-the-shelf special reach" are stipulated. In addition, various "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns shared by jackpot A and jackpot B, and various "special reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns for jackpot B. It is stipulated, and various "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are stipulated as fluctuation patterns for both hit and miss.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether the reach is out of front / back, the reach is out of front / back, or the reach is completely out.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach that is out of front and back. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach that is out of front and back.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is confirmed based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. To determine.

When the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 34). Will be sent. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S312 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640. , This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a hold process for the value when there is a start prize.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the variable display in the special symbol N1) is acquired (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If it is not less than (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203d is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set. , The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in each of the processes S407 to S412, the same process as each process of S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the second entry port 640. The only difference between the processes S407 to S412 is that the process of holding the reserved ball corresponding to the winning of the second entry port 640 is executed, and the other processes are different from the processes of S401 to S406. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. When each process of S407 to S412 is completed, the look-ahead process is executed (S413), and the main process is completed.

Next, the look-ahead process (S413) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S413). This look-ahead process (S413) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 28).

In this look-ahead processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new prize in the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 (S501), and any of the first entry opening 64 and the second entry opening 640. If there is no new prize (S501: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a new prize in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game state at the start of the fluctuation is the probability change state of the special symbol. If the determination is made (S502) and the special symbol is in a probabilistic state (S502: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for high probability (S503), and the process shifts to S505.

In the process of S502, when it is determined that the game state is not the probabilistic state of the special symbol (S502: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for the low probability time (S504), and the process is performed in S505. Move to. In the process of S505, each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3, which are the determination results of the jackpot, is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area (S505). Next, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result is set (S506), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second entry port 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

Next, if it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608), and if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: Yes), the jackpot of the special symbol is now. It is determined whether or not it is inside (S609). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is less likely to be a hit. This is to make it easier for the ball to enter the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special gaming state). That is, if it is easy to hit the normal symbol, the right-handed ball will easily enter the second special winning opening 640, so that the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a will be reached. It becomes difficult for the ball to reach. Therefore, during the special game state (during the big hit state), the hit probability of the normal symbol is not increased, and the ball is easily reached to the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a. There is.

In the processing of S609, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the second hit random number table 202c for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see 202c2 in FIG. 18C).

In the process of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the processing of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 is low. Based on the second hit random number table for the probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see 202c1 in FIG. 18C).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hitting is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: Yes), the special symbol is currently being hit. Whether or not it is determined (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to prevent the ball from entering the second entrance 640 as much as possible, when the ball hits the normal symbol, as in the low probability state of the normal symbol The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. The opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the 640 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set. While setting it to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S612: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: Yes), the variation display in the second symbol display device. The fluctuation time of is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the release period of the second entry port 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S602: Yes). S622). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device.

In the process of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device. Is set. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the variation display in the second symbol display device ends when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 34) is executed next. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted on) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, whether the lottery result of the normal symbol (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a hit of the normal symbol. Judgment (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set (S625), and this process is completed. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is opened / closed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 34) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is added by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the free hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area (S705), and this process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32. This NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S901). In this initial setting process, for example, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S912 in this case as well.

If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S912 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 34, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S910). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S911, S911) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S911, S912) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S911, S912) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S911, S912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S911), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S912). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the storage valve 607a is set to be closed (S913), and the process shifts to S914.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S90: No). S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S914. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S914, a command (state command) for notifying the gaming state at the time of power recovery is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S914). This state command is a command for notifying whether or not the special symbol is in the probable change state, whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state, the number of times of the normal symbol is shortened, and the like. A state command is generated according to the value of the time saving counter 203r and the state of the probability change flag 203g, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113. By outputting this state command, the recognition of the game state can be matched between the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the right-handed navigation (see FIG. 5 (a)) is displayed even though the special symbol is in the low probability state, or conversely, the player is in the probabilistic state of the special symbol. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B) from being displayed when the player strikes right-handed. That is, it is possible to match the gaming state with the effect to be executed.

When the process of S914 is completed, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 to allow the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 to execute various effects (S915). Next, the interrupt is permitted (S916), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1011 and S1012 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 28) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the first Jackpot control for opening or closing the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a of the 1 variable winning device 65 and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a of the second variable winning device 650. The process is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is opened according to the opening scenario set by the processing of S217 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26) for each round of the jackpot state. And set the closure. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 30), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27) ends, the first symbol display device 37 The executed variation display is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped at the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27). Display (light up display).

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 30), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. To do. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs variable display in which the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 30), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 30) after ending the variable display (see FIG. 30). Lighting display).

Next, based on the stored prize detection information, the prize information command setting process for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the prize information is executed (S1008). Based on the winning information command set by the winning information command setting process (S1008), the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not there is a defect in the storage valve 607a. It is also determined whether or not the player is performing an irregular game (left-handed during the jackpot state, left-handed during the probable change state of the special symbol, etc.).

When the processing of S1008 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: No), the power failure monitoring circuit The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252, and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1010). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001, and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1010: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011, S1012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of S1009, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 32 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1013 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1013), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1015), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S1009 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1008, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S901) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and the first specific prize is won. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, if the processing of S218 or S220 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26) is executed and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1101, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101: Yes), the opening command is set (S1102).

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect.

When the process of S1102 is completed, next, the storage valve 607a of the storage device 600 is set to be opened (S1103), and this process is completed. As described above, by opening the storage valve 607a, the balls that have entered the storage device 600 can flow down the induction flow path 607, so that a large number of prize balls (15) are paid out. It becomes possible to put a ball into 602 (see FIG. 9B).

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with a storage device 600, a first variable winning device 65, and a second variable winning device 650 in a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, during the special game state, in order to win the prize ball, the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is launched. A part of the ball enters the storage device 600. That is, in the special game state (big hit state), in addition to the prize ball based on the ball entering the first specific prize opening 65a or the second specific prize opening 650a, the general prize provided in the storage device 600 is provided. It is possible to have the player acquire a prize ball based on the ball entering the mouth (high value winning mouth) 602. Therefore, since the number of prize balls that can be obtained from the start to the end of the big hit can be increased, the player can be made to play the game more looking forward to becoming a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a probabilistic state of a special symbol or a time-saving state of a normal symbol is given after the end of the jackpot. As described above, in these states, it is easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, so that the player tries to enter the ball into the second entrance 640 by hitting right. (Trying to receive a lottery for special symbol 2). This allows the ball to flow into the storage device 600 in many cases before the next jackpot begins. Then, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state, so that the ball is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a by the time the next big hit occurs. Therefore, when the next big hit is made and the storage valve 607a is opened, the stored balls flow down to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. That is, the player can acquire a large amount (15) of prize balls immediately after the jackpot is started. Therefore, in a situation where the jackpot is won but the balls are exhausted, it is possible to secure the balls to be held for the jackpot game without newly requesting the rental of the balls.

In the process of S1101, if the jackpot of the special symbol is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1104). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1104, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S1104: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined by the processing of S1104 that the special symbol is being hit (S1104: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of a new round (S1105). Then, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), a jackpot operation for setting the operation of the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, the flow path switching valve 650d, or the like. The setting process is executed (S1105), and this process is terminated.

Here, the jackpot operation setting process (S1105) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the jackpot operation setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the 12th round of the jackpot is newly started (S1201), and it is not the 12th round (that is, the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds). If it is determined (S1201: No), then the opening of the first specific winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a is set (S1202), and the process shifts to S1206.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when it is determined that it is the 12th round (S1201: Yes), the opening operation of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a according to the jackpot type is read (S1203). As a result, in the case of the jackpot A, the opening operation shown in FIG. 16A is executed, and in the case of the jackpot B, the opening operation shown in FIG. 16B is executed. Next, the opening operation of the flow path solenoid 611 is set (S1202). That is, the induction flow path 652 is set to be closed 6.5 seconds after the start of the 12th round. Next, the opening operation of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a read by the processing of S1203 is set (S1205), and the processing shifts to S1206.

In the process of S1206 executed after the process of S1202 or S1205 is completed, a round number command indicating a newly started round is set (S1206), and this process is terminated. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

In this way, since each operation of the first variable winning device 65 is set at each start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Such problems can be suppressed.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 35. In the process of S1105, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), is it the operation timing of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the flow path solenoid 611? Determine (S1107). When it is determined that the operation timing is in the process of S1107 (S1107: Yes), the corresponding solenoid is set to ON (S1108).

On the other hand, in the process of S1107, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1107: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1108). Specifically, the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is closed based on the completion of the final round of the jackpot, the 15th round, and the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a. When the waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) for discharging the ball that has flowed into the inside of the is elapsed, it is determined as the start timing of the ending effect. If it is determined by the process of S1108 that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1108: Yes), the ending process is executed (S1109), and this process is terminated.

Here, the details of this ending process (S1110) will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process (S1110). In the ending process (S1110), first, an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S1301). The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of S1301 is completed, the storage valve 607a, which was set to the open state at the start of the jackpot, is then set to the closed state (S1302). As described above, the closed state of the storage valve 607a continues until the next big hit. As a result, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), even if the ball flows into the storage device 600, it is blocked by the storage valve 607a and becomes a general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. You will not be able to let the ball flow down. That is, since the ball enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a small number of winning balls, the merit of inserting the ball into the storage device 600 can be reduced. Therefore, even in a state other than the special game state (normal game state), by always aiming at the storage device 600, an irregular game method of increasing the number of balls to be thrown only by paying out the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is fundamental. It is possible to play a game with the expectation that it will be a big hit by drawing a special symbol in a state other than the special game state (big hit state).

As described above, the storage device 600 is configured such that one ball is inserted into approximately three right-handed balls. Then, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball is entered into the general prize opening (small value winning opening) 601 is three. That is, even if the right-handed hit is executed in the normal state, the lottery of the special symbol is difficult to be performed, and the number of balls cannot be increased by paying out based on the entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. This eliminates the merit of hitting right in the normal state, and allows the player to play the game with the aim of winning a big hit by drawing a special symbol.

In addition, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), a part of the ball hit to the right enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. In the time saving state of (that is, in the state where the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 provided in the path on the right side of the game board 13 is easily opened), the ball holding is further improved by hitting right. Can be made to. Therefore, despite the fact that the special symbol is in a probable state and the normal symbol is in a time-saving state, and the player is in an advantageous state, the number of balls held is steadily decreasing, which is an advantageous state. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from becoming unable to feel it. Therefore, the game can be continued without reducing the number of balls held in the probabilistic state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol.

The number of prize balls for entering the general prize opening (small value winning opening) 601 may be reduced (for example, the number of prize balls may be one). As a result, it is possible to more reliably suppress that the number of payouts becomes too large and the number of balls held increases too much in the probabilistic state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol. Therefore, it is possible to suppress giving an unexpected disadvantage to the hall. Further, in the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, the state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entry port 640), the merit of right-handed hitting can be further reduced.

When the processing of S1302 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1303), and if it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, the ball moves to the probability variation entry ball port 654 in the 12 rounds of the jackpot. Since it means that the ball has entered, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S1304). As a result, after the jackpot ends, it shifts to the probable state of the special symbol. After the processing of S1304, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to off (S1305), a state command including information indicating that the probability variation state of the special symbol is set is set (S1306), and this processing is terminated. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off in the processing of S1303 (S1303: No), it means that the ball did not enter the probability variation entry ball opening 654 in the 12 rounds of the jackpot. In order to set the time saving period of 100 ordinary symbols after the end of the jackpot, 100 is set to the value of the time saving medium counter 203r (S1307). Then, a state command including information indicating that the time saving state has been set is set (S1308), and this process is terminated. The state command set in the process of S1306 or S1308 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. Then, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the game state recognized by the main control device 110 and the game state recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately execute the effect according to the game state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, the probability variation flag 203g is set to on. That is, the timing at which the probability variation flag 203g is turned on can be matched regardless of the timing at which the ball enters the probability variation entry ball port 654. Therefore, it is possible to keep expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic game state until the jackpot game is completed. Furthermore, if the ball can be put into the probability change entry ball opening 654 during the special game state (during the jackpot state), the probability change state of the special symbol is given after the end of the jackpot, so that during the special game state (big hit). It is possible to be interested in whether or not the ball enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 654 (during the state).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 35. In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), then the ball is entered (winning) in the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, or the probability change. A winning process for monitoring the entry (winning) of a ball into the entry port 654 is executed (S1111). Here, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the contents of this winning process (S1111).

In the winning process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not the round game is set (round valid period) (S1401). That is, it is determined whether or not it is the period from the opening of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S1401: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1401: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball has entered either the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a (S1401: Yes). S1402). In the process of S1402, when it is determined that the ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a (S1402: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated (S1403). , The process shifts to S1404. On the other hand, if it is determined that no ball has entered any of the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a (S1402: No), the processing of S1403 is skipped and the processing is sent to S1404. And migrate.

In the process of S1404, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404: Yes), the winning opening set to the open state of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is closed. Is set (S1406). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S1407), and the process shifts to S1408. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, it is determined that the ball brushing time for discharging the remaining balls inside the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is in progress. it can.

On the other hand, in the process of S1404, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10 (S1404: No), the round time which is the period until each round of the jackpot ends (30 in this embodiment). Seconds) have passed (S1405). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed in the processing of S1405 (S1405: Yes), the processing shifts to S1406. On the other hand, in the process of S1405, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1405: No), the process shifts to S1408.

In the process of S1408, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1408), and when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1408: Yes), The value of the operation counter 203k is updated by subtracting only 1 (S1409), and then it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the probability change entry port 654 (whether or not it has passed a probability change switch (not shown)) (S1410). ). When it is determined that the sphere has passed the probability change switch (S1410: Yes), the value of the probability change passage counter 203i is updated by adding 1 (S1411), and the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412). The process shifts to S1413. On the other hand, in the process of S1410, when it is determined that the sphere has not passed through the probability change switch (S1410: No), each process of S1411, and S1412 is skipped, and the process shifts to S1413.

In the process of S1413 executed after the process of S1410 or S1412, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413), and if it is determined that it is not 0 (S1413: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1413, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413: Yes), the induction flow path 652 is closed by setting the flow path solenoid 611 to off (S1414), and the probability change is effective. The flag 203o is set to on (S1415), and this process ends. By setting the probability change effective flag 203o to ON by the processing of S1415, even after the flow path switching valve 650d is switched and the induction flow path 652 is closed, the sphere remaining in the induction flow path 652 is the probability change switch. When passing through, the probability variation setting flag 203h can be controlled to be set on (that is, the probability variation state of the special symbol is given after the big hit).

When it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 in the process of S1408 (S1408: No), it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203o is on (S1416). Then, when it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203o is not on (that is, is off) (S1416: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation effective flag 203o is on (S1416: Yes), it is updated by adding 1 to the value of the probability variation effective timer 203p (S1417). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation effective timer 203p is the upper limit value (1.2s in the present embodiment) (S1418), and if it is determined to be the upper limit value (S1418: Yes), the probability variation is valid. The flag 203o is set to off (S1419). As a result, even if the passage of the probability change switch is detected, the value of the probability change setting flag 203h is controlled so as not to be updated. As described above, when the passage of the probability change switch is detected after the value of the probability change effective timer 203p reaches the upper limit value, it is highly possible that the detection is due to some kind of fraudulent activity. Therefore, by turning off the probability change effective flag 203o, the update of the probability change setting flag 203h is prohibited, and fraudulent activity is suppressed.

When the process of S1419 is completed, the value of the probability variation effective timer 203p is then reset to 0 (S1420), which is the initial value, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1418, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation effective timer 203p is not the upper limit value (less than the upper limit value) (S1418: No), the process shifts to the above-mentioned S1410.

As a result, if the probability variation effective timer 203p is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed the probability variation switch, so that the probability variation state of the special symbol can be set in consideration of the sphere brushing time. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time during which the passage of the probability change switch is determined to be effective, it is possible to prevent the ball from being illegally passed through the probability change switch and being given a probability change state of a special symbol.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 35. When the winning process (S1111) is executed, then, an abnormality process for detecting an abnormality generated during the special game state (big hit state) is executed (S1112), and this process is terminated. Here, the details of this abnormality processing (S1112) will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this abnormality processing (S1112).

In the abnormal processing (S1112), first, it is determined whether the round valid period is (S1501), and if it is determined that the round valid period is out of the round valid period (S1501: No), the present processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1501: Yes), whether or not the ball has passed through the ball outlet switch provided in the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650. Determined (S1502). When it is determined that the ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch (S1502: Yes), the value of the ball discharge counter 203s is updated by 1 (S1503), and the process shifts to S1504. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has not passed through the ball discharge port switch (S1502: No), the process of S1503 is skipped and the process shifts to S1504.

In the process of S1504, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1504), and when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer flag 203m is off (S1504: No), this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1504: Yes), it means that the ball brushing period is in progress, so 1 is added to the remaining ball timer 203n that clocks the ball brushing period. And update (S1505). Then, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203n after the update is the upper limit value (that is, whether 3 seconds have passed since the closure of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a was set). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit (3 seconds have not passed) (S1506: No), the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1505, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), the number of discharged balls (the total value of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the discharged number counter 203q) is displayed. , It is determined whether or not the number of winnings (value of the winning number counter 203j) matches (S1507).

In the process of S1507, when it is determined that the number of ejected balls and the number of winnings match (S1507: Yes), the process shifts to S1509. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of balls ejected and the number of winnings do not match (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508), and the process shifts to S1509. The error command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, displaying characters of a winning number mismatch error) is set, and an error signal output is set for the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to illegally leave the game ball in the first variable winning device 65 and suppress the illegality of passing the ball through the probability change switch.

In the process of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to off (S1509), and the remaining ball timer 203n is reset to the initial value 0 (S1510). After that, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203q, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are each reset to the initial values (S1511), and this process is terminated.

Next, the winning information command setting process (S1008) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. As described above, the winning information command setting process (S1008) is a process for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the passing status of the ball to the various winning openings (entrances).

In this prize information command setting process, first, the prize detection information saved in the switch read process (S101) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25) is read (S1601). Then, it is determined whether new winning detection information exists (whether there is a new winning ball for any of the entrances) (S1602), and if there is no new winning detection information (S1603), it is as it is. This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1602, when it is determined that new prize detection information exists (S1602: Yes), the ball entry (winning opening) that detects the winning (winning) according to the new winning detection information. The winning information command including the information of (S1603) is set. The winning information command is composed of, for example, 2 bytes, and each winning opening, an out opening, or the like is associated with each bit of the 2 bytes. Then, the bit corresponding to the winning opening (entry opening) that detects the entry (winning) of the ball is set to 1, and the bit corresponding to the winning opening (entry opening) in which the ball is not entered is set to 0. After being set, it is output as a winning information command. When the process of S1603 is completed, the stored winning detection information is cleared (S1604), and this process is completed.

The winning information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not there is a problem in the intellectual storage device 600, whether or not the player is playing an irregular game, or the like, in response to the winning information command. Then, when a defect or the like has occurred, a display error command corresponding to the type of the defect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display error command, the third symbol display device 81 notifies the error.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 47, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1701). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1816 (see FIG. 42) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1702). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1813 in FIG. 42), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1816. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1816 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1702: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S1816 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1703).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1706. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1703: Yes), the process proceeds to S1704 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1703: No), the process proceeds to S1708.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1703: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1704. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1516 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1703: No), and the data shifts to S1708.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1702: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S1816, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1704 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1704, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1704). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1705: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1706). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1705: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1707), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1708, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1708). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1816 is executed (see S1815 in FIG. 42). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1816 is executed, the process of S1708 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1816 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1708: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1709), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1710), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S1711) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1708 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power supply is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S1708 via the processes of S1704 to S1706 This is the case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1708: No), S1709, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1710, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1710). Next, the probability change state flag 223f and the probability change state counter 223g are updated (S1711) according to the game state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110, interrupt permission is set (S1712), and the process proceeds to the main process. Transition. By updating the probability change state flag 223f and the probability change state counter 223g based on the state command, the game state recognized by the main control device 110 and the game state recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately execute the effect according to the game state.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1709 is that when the processing of S1708 is reached via the processing of S1704 to S1706, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1704. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the process of S1801 this time was executed (S1801), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1801: No), the process proceeds to S1811 without performing the processes of S1802 to S1810. In the process of S1801, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S1802 to S1810 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1811 and the variation display setting process of S1812 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1811 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1812 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1801 (S1801: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1803 to S1812 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1802). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1808 described later (S1803), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1804). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1805 without being notified by the power on notification process.

In the process of S1805, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1806). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1807). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1808), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1809). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1809, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1810). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1808 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1809 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1811). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

Next, the process proceeds to S1812. In the process of S1812, the variable display setting process is executed (S1812). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

Then, when the variable display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1813). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1813 (S1813: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S1815), and the power-off process is executed (S1816). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1817), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1813 (S1813: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1814), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1814: No), the process returns to the process of S1801 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1814: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1811) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1811). This command determination process (S1811) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. It is a process for.

In the command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S1901). When the variation pattern command is received (S1901: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1902), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1903). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 47) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1901: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1904). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1904: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1905), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1906), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 47) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1904: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1907). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S1907: Yes), it is determined whether the received hold ball number command is the special figure 1 hold ball number command or the special figure 2 hold ball number command. , That is, the value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d of the main control device 110 (the number of times the variable display is held in the special symbol N1), or the special symbol 2 reserved ball of the main controller 110 The value of the number counter 203e (the number of holdings N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1908). Further, in the process of S1908, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c is set. After the processing of S1908 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the reserved ball number command is issued from the main control device 110 when a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640, or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted, every time a start winning prize is detected or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball of the voice lamp control device 113 are processed by the processing of S1908. The value of the number counter 223c can be matched with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol of the main control device 110. Even if it deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of detecting the starting prize or drawing the special symbol. Can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. When the process of S1908 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c is issued. Set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1907, when it is determined that the hold ball number command has not been received (S1907: No), then it is determined whether or not the state command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1909). Then, when the state command is received (S1909: Yes), the probability change state flag 203f and the time saving state counter 203g are updated according to the game state notified by the state command (S1910), and this process is terminated. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S1909, when it is determined that the state command has not been received (S1909: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1911). Then, when the winning information command is received (S1911: Yes), it is determined based on the winning information command whether or not the ball is a normal ball, and if there is a possibility of a defect or fraud, an error is notified. The error notification process for the operation is executed (S1912), and this process is terminated.

on the other hand. In the process of S1911, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S1911: No), then it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S1913), and if the opening command has been received (S1911: No). S1913: Yes), the jackpot medium flag 223h is set to on, and the counter value (1000) corresponding to one second is set to the value of the permissible time counter 223i (S1914). Then, the display opening command is set (S1915), and this process is terminated. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display an opening effect for notifying the start of the jackpot.

In the process of S1913, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S1913: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1916). Then, when it is determined that the ending command has been received by the processing of S1916 (S1916: Yes), the jackpot middle flag 223h is set to off, and the counter value (1000) corresponding to 1 second corresponds to the value of the permissible time counter 223i. Is set (S1917), the display ending command is set (S1918), and this process is terminated. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display an ending effect for notifying the end of the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S1916, if the ending command is not received (S1911: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1919). ), Return to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46, the details of the error notification process (S1912) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. As described above, this error notification process is a process for notifying an error when there is a possibility of a defect or fraud. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this error notification process (S1912).

In the error notification process (S1912), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 223h is on (S1931), and if it is on (S1931: Yes), among the winning information notified by the received winning information command. It is determined whether or not the winning information for the first ball opening 64 is included in (S1932). Then, when it is determined that the winning information for the first entrance 64 is included (S1932: Yes), the player strikes left despite the big hit, and as a result, the first entrance 64 It means that the ball has entered the ball. That is, the player is performing a game method (striking method) in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a despite the special gaming state (big hit state). It means that the person is losing. Therefore, in order for the player to acquire the prize ball in the special gaming state (big hit state), a display error command corresponding to the left-handed warning image (see FIG. 7A) is set (S1933) and processed. To S1934.

The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving this display rear image change command, the display control device 114 displays a left-handed warning image (FIG. 7A) on the third symbol display device 81. The left-handed warning image (FIG. 7A) can be used to encourage a player who is left-handed in a special gaming state (big hit state) to right-handed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from losing money and to obtain the prize ball more reliably.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1932, if it is determined that the winning information command does not include the winning information corresponding to the entry into the first entrance 64 (S1932: No), the processing of S1933 is skipped and the processing is performed. To S1934.

In the processing of S1934, it is determined whether or not the value of the permissible time counter 223i is 0 (S1934), and if the counter value is 0 (S1934: Yes), a problem occurs in the storage valve 607a during the jackpot. If there is, a hit notification process for notifying is executed (S1935), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the permissible time counter 223i is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S1934: No), the ball brushing period (1 second) after the storage valve 607a is set to the open state is set. Since it means that the process has not elapsed, the process of S1935 is skipped and the present process is terminated. That is, when a ball that has flowed (advanced) into the induction flow path 606 immediately before the storage valve 607a is opened enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 during the ball brushing period, a problem occurs. It prevents it from being judged as.

On the other hand, in the process of S1931 when it is determined that the jackpot middle flag 223h is not on (off) (S1931: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the permissible time counter 233i is 0 (S1936). When it is determined to be 0 (S1936: Yes), it is notified when a problem occurs in the storage valve 607a during normal time (either the probability variation state of the special symbol, the time reduction state of the normal symbol, or the normal state). The normal time notification process for performing the above is executed (S1937), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the permissible time counter 223i is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S1936: No), the ball is thrown after the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state based on the end of the jackpot. Since it means that the period (1 second) has not elapsed, the process of S1937 is skipped and the present process is terminated. That is, when a ball that has flowed (advanced) into the induction flow path 607 immediately before the storage valve 607a is closed enters the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 during the ball brushing period, a problem occurs. To prevent it from being judged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the details of the hit notification process (S1935) for notifying when a problem occurs in the storage valve 607a during the jackpot will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this hit notification process (S1935).

In the hit notification process (S1935), first, the winning information command determined to have been received in the processing of S1911 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43) is used to enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. It is determined whether or not the corresponding winning information is included (S1941). Then, if the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included (S1941: Yes), even during the jackpot where the storage valve 607a should be set to the open state. Regardless, it means that the ball has entered the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 provided downstream of the induction flow path 606. That is, it is possible that the storage valve 607a is not opened due to a failure of the storage valve 607a or the like, and the ball is continuously stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a, and as a result, the ball is guided to the induction flow path 606. There is sex. Therefore, in this case, a display error command corresponding to the defect of the storage valve 607a is set (S1942), and this process is terminated.

The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving this display error command, the display control device 114 provides a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 607a of the third symbol display device 81 has a problem. Is displayed.

The ball that has flowed into the induction flow path 606 may also enter the out port 603a arranged on the left side of the general winning opening 601 in the storage device 600, but the ball enters the out port 603a. The corresponding winning information is not subject to determination as to whether or not a problem has occurred in the storage valve 607a. This is because, of the balls that have flowed into the induction flow path 606, the proportion of the balls that flow down to the out port 603a is small, and most of the balls enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 and are a big hit. Since a large amount of balls flow into the storage device 600, it is possible to sufficiently determine whether or not a problem has occurred by monitoring the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. Further, by discriminating only the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, it is not necessary to perform the process of determining whether or not the ball has entered the out opening 603a. , The processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

If it is determined in the processing of S1941 that the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is not included (S1941: No), then the received winning information command is generalized. It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the entry to the winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is included (S1943), and the winning corresponding to the winning to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is performed. If the information is included (S1943: Yes), it is updated by adding 1 to the value of the winning count counter 223j (S1944). Then, in order to update the image in the jackpot according to the value of the winning number counter 233j after the update, a display rear image change command is set (S1945).

The display rear image change command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. , Is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display rear image change command, the display control device 114 updates the display content of the winning number display area MA in the third symbol display device 81. More specifically, it is updated after the image in which the number of balls entered (the number of EXTRA BONUS) into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 shown in FIG. 6B is added and displayed for a certain period of time is displayed. The image shown in FIG. 6A corresponding to the number of times the ball is entered later is displayed. By displaying the number of winnings for the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the jackpot in the winning number display area MA, the ball can be entered in the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a in the jackpot. Separately, the player can be made to recognize the number of times the prize ball has been won. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the number of times the ball will be entered into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 will increase. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the present embodiment, it is configured to determine that a problem has occurred in the storage valve 604a when the ball entry information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included. However, even when the winning information command includes the winning information corresponding to the entry into the out port 603a, the display error command may be set. As a result, it is possible to more quickly and surely determine that a problem has occurred in the storage valve 607a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, in order to notify when a problem occurs in the storage valve 607a during the normal time (either the probability variation state of the special symbol, the time reduction state of the normal symbol, or the normal state). The normal time notification process will be described. In this normal time notification process (S1937), first, it is determined whether or not the probability change state flag 223f is on (S1951), and if it is determined that it is not on (S1951), the present is not the probability change state of the special symbol (S1951). Since it means that it is in a low probability state of a special symbol), it is then determined whether or not the value of the time saving state counter 223g is larger than 0 (S1952). In the process of S1952, when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 223g is 0 (S1952: No), it means that the present is neither the probabilistic state of the special symbol nor the time saving state of the normal symbol (normal state). means.

In this case, in order to determine whether or not the player is right-handed and whether or not there is a problem in the operation of the storage valve 607a, first, the received prize information command is added to the general prize opening (high value). (Winning opening) It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the entry into the 602 is included (S1953). Then, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is included (S1953: Yes), the ball is not in the special gaming state (big hit state). Means that it is flowing downstream from the position where it should be closed by the storage valve 607a. That is, there is a high possibility that the storage valve 607a is not normally closed, or the player illegally inserts the ball into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. Therefore, a display error command corresponding to the defect of the storage valve 607a is set (S1954), and this process is terminated.

The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving this display error command, the display control device 114 provides a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 607a of the third symbol display device 81 has a problem. Is displayed.

In addition, the balls flowing into the induction flow path 607 with the storage valve 607a left open due to a defect are out ports 603b arranged on the left and right of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. , 603c may also be entered, but the winning information corresponding to the entry into the out ports 603b and 603c is not a target for determining whether or not a problem has occurred in the storage valve 607a. This is because a small proportion of the balls that have flowed into the induction flow path 607 flow down to the out ports 603b and 603c, and most of the balls enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. This is because if the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is monitored, it can be sufficiently determined whether or not a problem has occurred. Further, by discriminating only the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, it is not necessary to perform the process of determining whether or not the ball has entered the out openings 603b and 603c. Since it is improved, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Further, in the processing of S1953, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is not included in the winning information command (S1953: No), then the general winning opening is used. It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the entry into the mouth (small value winning opening) 601 is included in the winning information command (S1955), and if it is determined that the winning information is not included, this process is terminated as it is. ..

On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included in the winning information command (S1955: Yes), the normal time (probability change state of the special symbol, It means that the player is hitting right in spite of (either the time saving state of the normal symbol or the normal state). That is, it means that the player is playing the game by a game method in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 and there is little chance of receiving a lottery of a special symbol. Therefore, in this case, the game is played by displaying a right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B) that urges the player to play the game aiming at the first entrance 64 by left-handed. It is possible to prevent a person from losing money and to receive a lottery for special symbol 1.

When it is determined in the processing of S1951 that the probability variation state flag 223f is on (S1951: Yes), or when it is determined in the processing of S1952 that the value of the time saving state counter 223g is larger than 0 (S1952: Yes), It is determined whether or not the winning information command includes the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 (S1957). Then, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is not included (S1957: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1957, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is included (S1957: Yes), it is not in the special gaming state (big hit state). Nevertheless, it means that the ball is flowing down to the downstream side of the storage valve 607a. That is, there is a possibility that the player has illegally entered the ball into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 while the storage valve 607a is not normally closed or the storage valve 607a is closed. high. Therefore, in this case, a display error command corresponding to the defect of the storage valve 607a is set (S1958), and this process is terminated.

The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving this display error command, the display control device 114 provides a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 607a of the third symbol display device 81 has a problem. Is displayed.

In the present embodiment, it is configured to determine that a problem has occurred in the storage valve 604a when the ball entry information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is included. However, even when the winning information command includes the winning information corresponding to the entry into the out ports 603b and 603c, the display error command may be set. As a result, it is possible to more quickly and surely determine that a problem has occurred in the storage valve 607a.

Next, the variation display setting process (S1812) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S1812). This variation display setting process (S1812) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2001). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2001: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S2006 is started. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S2001: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S2002), and then the variation pattern is processed in S1903 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from RAM 223 (S2003).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2004). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S2005). In the process of S2005, the data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S2006.

In the process of S2006, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2006). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S2006: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so that S2007 to S2013 Each process up to is skipped, and the process is transferred to S2014. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2006: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2007), and then in the process of S1906 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from RAM 223 (S2008), and the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is used as it is in the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. It is set as the stop type (S2008). Next, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2009). When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

When the processing of S2009 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the value of the time saving state counter 223g is greater than 0 (S2010: No), and if it is determined that the value is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) (S2010: No). No), the process shifts to S2014. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 203g is larger than 0 (S2010: Yes), first, the value of the time saving state counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (S2011). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving state counter 203g after subtraction is 0 (S2012), and if it is determined to be 0 (S2012), the time saving state of the normal symbol is changed to the normal state (low) of the normal symbol. Since it means that the state has been switched to the stochastic state), a back image change command for switching to the back image corresponding to the normal state is set (S2013), and the process shifts to S2014.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2012, when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 203g is not 0 (S2012: No), it means that the time saving state of the normal symbol continues, so that the back surface corresponding to the time saving state of the normal symbol No need to change from the image. Therefore, in this case, the process of S2013 is skipped and the process is shifted to S2014.

The rear image displayed in the time saving state is specifically a rear image in which a right-handed navigation (see FIG. 5A) is displayed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is completed, the right-handed navigation is displayed regardless of the jackpot type. Then, when the time saving state of the normal symbol ends, it is switched to the back image for the normal state in which the right-handed navigation is not displayed. If the special symbol is in a probable state after the jackpot ends, the special symbol will continue to be probabilistic until the next big hit, so the right-handed navigation will not be changed from the back type displayed.

In the processing of S2014, it is determined whether or not the value of the permissible time counter 223i is larger than 0 (S2014), and if it is determined that the value is larger than 0 (S2014: Yes), the value of the permissible time counter 223i is set to 1. Subtract and update (S2015), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the permissible time counter 223i is 0 (S2014: No), the process of S2015 is skipped and the present process is terminated. By the processing of S2014 and S2015, the value of the permissible time counter 223i can be updated periodically.

In the present embodiment, the back type set for the probabilistic state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol is common, but different back types may be displayed. As a result, a wide variety of effects can be realized. Further, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to display the remaining time saving period according to the value of the time saving state counter 203g. As a result, the player can easily recognize the remaining time saving period.

In the present embodiment, the permissible time counter 223h is updated in the variable display setting process (S1812), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be updated in a process (sound editing / output process, liquid crystal effect execution management process, etc.) executed every 1 ms in the main process (see FIG. 42). As a result, the permissible time counter 223h can be updated periodically.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 61. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 48, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM becomes faster. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2101), and the display control device 114 enables various controls for the third symbol display device 81 to be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2101) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2201). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2202). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2201.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S2202, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2202, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2203). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2204), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S2101 in FIG. 48) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2102 in FIG. 48) (S2205), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S2201) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 49, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2201 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1901 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S1902. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2203 to S2205 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2201 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2201. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S2202 and S2202, the processes of S2203 to S2205 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2203 to S2205 without performing the processes of S2201 and S2202. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 48. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2102). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2103). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2103, then the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S2104). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2104, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2105). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 59 (a)) described later. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S3602 in FIG. 59 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during that time, a simple command determination process (FIG. 50) is performed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50 (b)). 50 (b) S2408) and the simple display setting process (see S2409 in FIG. 50 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that the character ROM 234 is used, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, the player entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (starting prize), and the start instruction of the variable effect was given. When the main control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the fluctuation effect period, and a simple fluctuation is performed. You can produce. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the power failure is restored. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S2105, interrupt permission is set (S2106), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2106, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 50 (a). FIG. 50A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2301), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 50 (b). FIG. 50B is a flowchart showing this V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 24) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 50B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2401), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2401: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed. The command determination process (S2402) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S2403) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2402), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start the variation effect, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55.

In the display setting process (S2403), one frame of images to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2402) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2404). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2403) or the simple display setting process (S2409). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2405). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2406). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2405), which are determined in the task process (S2404), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 24 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 61.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2407). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S2407, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, front / rear out reach, front / rear out reach, complete The stop type table corresponding to the missed, chance eye) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2401 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2401: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2408) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2409) is executed to shift to the process of S2404.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2402), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 51, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2501), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2501: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2503) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2502), and then the command The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2503).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2504), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2504: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2505), the process returns to S2501.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2505) will be described with reference to FIG. 52 (a). FIG. 52A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S2601).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 is used for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2601 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2602). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S2601 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2603). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S2603, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2601, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S2604), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S2605). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S2606), the variation pattern command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2605, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2601. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S2602e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2604, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 51. In the processing of S2504, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2504: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2506). If there is a display variable type command (S2206: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2507), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2507) will be described with reference to FIG. 52 (b). FIG. 52B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete off, or chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command. (S2701), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S2702).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2702 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. (S2703), and this process ends.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2702 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2404), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2702 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S2703, and the stop symbol is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2701, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S2702.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete disengagement. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2506, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2506: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S2508), and the display is performed. If there is an opening command for (S2508: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S2509), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S2509) will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (a). FIG. 53A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the display opening command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2801). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S2801 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2802).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S2803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2803). S2804). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S2805), the opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this opening command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2804, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2801 The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S2802. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set opening display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the data is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Further, when this opening command processing is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, the image data required for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is produced due to the slow read speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data used for the above to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening effect of the third symbol display device 81 is completed, and thus indicates the first round. If the image data required for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command, a lot of waiting is required from the end of the opening effect to the start of the round effect. There was a risk that time would be generated and the player would feel uncomfortable or anxious about whether the operation had stopped.

Further, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects (for 15 rounds) in the third symbol display device 81 are completed. If the image data required for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display ending command, there is a lot of waiting time from the end of the round effect to the start of the ending effect. There is a risk that the player may feel uneasy or uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation has stopped.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the display opening command is received, the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and by the time the jackpot variation display is completed on the third symbol display device 81. , Control is performed so that the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is completed. As a result, when the opening effect is completed in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects (15 rounds) are performed in the third symbol display device 81. ) When the process is completed, the ending effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player does not feel anxious or uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation has stopped. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2508, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S2508: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2510), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S2510: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2511), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2511) will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (b). FIG. 53B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S2901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2902).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2904). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S2905), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 51. In the processing of S2510, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2510: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2512), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S2512: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S2513), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S2513) will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S3001). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3002).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3001, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S3003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3003). S3004). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3006), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 51. In the processing of S2512, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S2512: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2514), and the rear image is determined. If there is a change command (S2514: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2515), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S2515) will be described with reference to FIG. 55 (a). FIG. 55A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S3603) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S3101). .. Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the back image corresponding to other back image types is turned on. The determination flag is set to off (S3102), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S3101 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S3102. .. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task process, when it is specified to display any of the back images A to C according to the back image type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S3102 is used. , The back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. (Whether it is a resident video RAM 235 or a normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2802, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 51. In the processing of S2514, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S2514: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2516), and there is an error command. If (S2516: Yes), the error command processing is executed (S2517), and the process returns to the processing of S2501.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2517) will be described with reference to FIG. 55 (b). FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3201). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S3202). The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3201, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S3202 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process in S2902, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 51. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2516 (S2516: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2518), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

In the processing of S2501 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes). ), The processing of S2502 to S2518 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2501 to S2518 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2501 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2409) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50B) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, only the commands required to display the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are sent from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 52 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 52 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 52A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2601. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2602, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2403), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 56, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3301), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3301: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of S3302 to S3304 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3305. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S3301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S3302), S3303 to S3304 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S3303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3303: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3304).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to, and all the error discrimination set to be ON is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3401).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and it is necessary to draw the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. for each sprite. Determine various parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3401, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 56. After the warning image setting process (S3304) or in the process of S3303, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3303: No), then the process proceeds to the process of S3305.

In S3305, the pointer update process is executed (S3305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3501). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3501, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S3502). As a result, if it is End information (S3502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S3503), and if it is a demo display data table (S3503: Yes), the display data table buffer. The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S3504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3505), this process is completed, and the display is performed. Return to the setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S3503, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S3506). ), Ends this process and returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address of the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3502: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 56 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S3306 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3308). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3308: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S3308: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S3309).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is on (S3309: Yes), the confirmation display has not been produced yet, and it is time to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S3310), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3311). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3313). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S3314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3315), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. As such, the drawing content can be set. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2404), from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3315. , The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3309, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S3309: No), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S3316). If the demo display flag is off (S3316: Yes), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer. It is set to 233d (S3317), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3318). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3320), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S3321), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that is displayed.

In the process of S3316, if the demo display flag is on (S3316: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S2409) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on ends, the variation image at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command is stopped for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table specified to be displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S2405), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 59A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3601: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S3602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 59 (b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3601, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3601: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Has been transferred to. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 60.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3602), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 59 (b). FIG. 59B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S3701), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3701: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3702). In the process of S3702, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S3702 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3702: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3702: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3703. Further, as a result of the process of S3701, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3701: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3703.

In the process of S3703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3703), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3703: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3704), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data) is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S3703 (S3703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S3705), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 50 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S2409 in FIG. 50 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 51 to 55) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 56 to 58) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 60) (see S3601: No in FIG. 59 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a normal image transfer setting process (S3603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3305) of the display setting process (S2403) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S3801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S3802), and if it is the transfer data information (S3802: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S3803) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3804), and the process proceeds to S3805.

Further, in the process of S3802, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S3802: No), the processes of S3803 and S3804 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3805. In the process of S3805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3806).

In the process of S3806, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S3806 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3806: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3806: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3807. Further, as a result of the processing of S3805, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3805: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3807.

In the process of S3807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3807), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3807: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3808), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3803 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S3813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3807: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S3809). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S3809: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S3809: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S3810), the rear image provided for each rear image type is provided. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3811). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image indicated by the rear image discrimination flag is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). The start address is acquired (S3812), and the process proceeds to S3813.

In the process of S3813, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3813). The discrimination in the process of S3813 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S3813, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3813: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3813 (S3813: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3814). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S3814, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3815), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. The image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2406), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2404) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2405), the drawing list shown in FIG. 24 is generated (S3901). That is, in the processing of S3901, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2404). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the sprite image data is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2405), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the start address of the storage source to the final address of the storage source is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the process of S3902 (S3903). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 50B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, there are two types of winning openings (first specific winning opening 65a and second specific winning opening 650a) as winning openings opened in the special gaming state (big hit state). ) Is provided so that either winning opening is opened according to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Both of these two types of winning openings are configured as winning openings in which a large amount (15) of prize balls are paid out when the balls enter. Further, the two types of winning openings (the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a) are both provided in the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13. As a result, the ball can be entered regardless of which winning opening is opened by simply launching the ball to the right side (striking right) of the game board 13 during the special gaming state (big hit state). Therefore, the number of prize balls paid out in the special game state (big hit state) can be made less likely to be affected by the skill of the player, so that even a beginner can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the paths (flow paths) provided on the right side of the game board 13, two types of winning openings (first specific winning opening 65a and second specific winning opening 650a) are used. A storage device 600 provided with a plurality of winning openings is arranged on the upstream side. The storage device 600 is configured so that when a player makes a right-handed hit, a part of the launched ball can flow into the inside of the storage device 600, and the inflowing ball is moved to a different winning opening. A plurality of flow paths are provided for flowing down. Specifically, the number of prize balls is compared with the induction flow path 606 for allowing the balls to flow down to the general prize opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a relatively small number of prize balls (three prize balls). A guide flow path 607 for allowing the balls to flow down to the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602, which has a large number of prize balls (15 prize balls), is provided. Since the number of prize balls that can be obtained can be different depending on the type of the guiding flow path that flows down, when the ball flows into the storage device 600, the flow path in which the ball flows down to the player. The type can be observed with interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, a storage capable of closing the guide flow path 607 for flowing the balls down to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 having a relatively large number of prize balls (15 prize balls). A valve 607a is provided in the induction flow path 607. The storage valve 607a is set to the open state during the special gaming state (during the jackpot state), and is set to the closed state during the other gaming states. Further, the game balls that have flowed into the storage device 600 are basically arranged so that they can easily flow into the guide flow path 607 rather than the guide flow path 606 (FIG. 9 (FIG. 9). b) See). Therefore, in the special game state (big hit state), in addition to being able to obtain a prize ball by inserting the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, it is provided downstream of the induction flow path 607. A prize ball can be obtained by inserting a ball into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. A storage device 600 is provided on the upstream side of the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, and the player simply hits the right to make the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, and the second specific winning opening 650a. This is because the ball can be inserted into either the storage device 600 or the storage device 600. As a result, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one special game state (big hit state) can be increased, so that the player's merit by becoming a big hit can be enhanced. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game more enjoyably to be a big hit, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the prize is won, and if the lottery result is a winning lottery result, a specific winning opening is opened and the specific winning opening is reached. Some give a large amount of prize balls based on the balls entering (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-129177). In this conventional gaming machine, a plurality of winning openings are provided in addition to the specific winning openings, and by adjoining the specific winning openings and the other winning openings, a specific winning opening can be used. Some of the balls that are aimed and launched are configured so that they can enter both a specific winning opening and other winning openings. Here, one of the triggers is that a specific number of balls enter a specific winning opening, and the control is generally performed to close the specific winning opening. Therefore, the number of winning balls for a specific winning opening. The more balls enter into other winning openings before the number reaches a specific number, the more prize balls the player can obtain. Therefore, by adjoining a specific winning opening and another winning opening, the number of prize balls in the winning can be increased, so that the player's expectation for the winning can be further improved.

However, in conventional gaming machines, there are cases where an irregular gaming method is performed in which a winning ball is obtained by launching a ball aiming at another winning opening adjacent to a specific winning opening even in a state other than hitting. It was.

On the other hand, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), the induction flow path 607 is closed by the storage valve 607a. In this state, one ball can be stored in the space formed by the upper part of the storage valve 607a and the upstream part of the induction flow path 607. Therefore, the storage device 600 is the first storage device 600 after the storage valve 607a is closed. The ball that has flowed into the inside of the storage valve 607a is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a. When the spheres flow into the storage device 600 with the spheres stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a, the spheres change the flow direction by colliding with the stored spheres, and as a result, the spheres enter the induction flow path 602. (See Fig. 9 (b)). Therefore, even if the ball is put into the storage device 600 in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), the ball can easily enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with few winning balls. Therefore, the merit of putting the ball into the storage device 600 can be reduced. Therefore, even in a state other than the special game state, by always aiming at the storage device 600, an irregular game method of increasing the number of balls to be played only by paying out the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is fundamentally not established, and the special In a state other than the game state (big hit state), it is possible to play the game with the expectation that it will be a big hit by drawing a special symbol.

It should be noted that the storage device 600 is configured so that one ball enters the storage device 600 out of approximately three right-handed balls. Then, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball is entered into the general prize opening (small value winning opening) 601 is three. In other words, even if a right-handed hit is executed in a game state other than the special game state (big hit state), the lottery of the special symbol is difficult to be performed, and the payout is based on the entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. It is also not possible to increase the number of balls by. This eliminates the merit of hitting right in the normal state, and allows the player to play the game with the aim of winning a big hit by drawing a special symbol.

In the present embodiment, the ball flowing down the induction flow path 606 enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 and the ball flowing down the induction flow path 607 enters the general winning opening 602. It is configured to do, but is not limited to this. For example, a known crune means provided with a plurality of winning openings is provided on the downstream side of each induction flow path, and different prize balls are paid out according to the winning openings to be entered. May be good. As a result, even if the guide flow path 606 flows down, a large number of prize balls can be obtained by entering the prize balls into the prize opening having a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out. Therefore, the player can be interestedly watched until the ball that has entered the storage device 600 enters any of the winning openings. Therefore, when the ball enters the storage device 600, the player can be more entertained.

In the present embodiment, the induction flow path 607 is blocked by the storage valve 607a so that the sphere can be stored in the middle of the induction flow path 607. For example, the induction flow path is provided by using an electromagnet or the like. It may be configured to store the sphere in the middle of 607. That is, an electromagnet is embedded in the inner wall portion of the induction flow path 607, and the electromagnet is magnetized by energizing the electromagnet in a state other than the special gaming state (during the jackpot state). As a result, the sphere that first flows into the induction flow path 607 can be attracted to the location where the electromagnet is provided, and the flow of the sphere can be stopped (the sphere is stored at the position of the electromagnet). With this configuration, the space for burying the storage valve 607a can be reduced. Therefore, the storage device 600 can be made more compact. Further, in this case, the width of the guide flow path 607 is widened (for example, in FIG. 8, the branch member 604 and the storage valve 607a are deleted), and among the guide flow paths 607, the guide flow path 605 The electromagnet may be embedded only in the portion directly below, and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 may be provided directly below the portion in which the electromagnet is embedded. Further, when there is a sphere that is attracted by the electromagnet and the flow is stopped, the stopped sphere and another sphere come into contact with the electromagnet portion to change the flow direction, so that the electromagnet is not embedded. The portion may be flowed down so as to flow down in a direction different from that of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. Then, the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 may be arranged below the portion of the induction flow path 607 in which the electromagnet is not embedded. As a result, the branch member 604 can be abolished, so that the number of parts of the storage device 600 can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of balls stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a is one, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more balls may be stored. Further, when a plurality of spheres are stored, they may be stored in the vertical direction or may be stored side by side.

In the present embodiment, the ball is configured to be able to be stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve 607a may be provided at the upper end of the induction flow path 607 so that when the storage valve 607a is closed, the ball cannot flow into the induction flow path 607. By adopting a configuration in which the balls are not stored, even if the ball is hit right in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), the balls can be discharged without remaining inside the storage device 600.

In particular, in the first embodiment, the second entrance 640 is likely to be opened in the high probability state of the special symbol given after the end of the big hit or the time saving state of the normal symbol. Further, in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the starting prize at the second entrance 640), the game is compared with the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the starting prize at the first entrance 64). It tends to be a jackpot B that is advantageous to the person. Therefore, when the jackpot is completed, the player launches the ball in an attempt to enter the ball into the second entrance 640 by right-handed hitting. Therefore, for example, when the time saving period of the normal symbol ends, the ball is stored in the storage device 600 with high probability. This may cause the player to feel that the ball has been damaged. On the other hand, by providing the storage valve 607a at the upper end of the induction flow path 607 so that the storage device 600 does not store the ball, the player can feel that the ball has been used up without waste. .. Therefore, a feeling of satisfaction can be given to the player.

In the present embodiment, the general winning openings (small value winning openings) 601, 602 and the out openings 603a to 603c are provided inside the storage device 600, but the present embodiment is not limited to this configuration. For example, the second entry port 640 may be arranged at a position where the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is provided. That is, in the first embodiment, of the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13, the second entry port 640 provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 is moved to the inside of the storage device 600. You may. Further, in this case, as an opening condition of the storage valve 607a, for example, the storage valve 607a is configured to be opened when the lottery of the special symbol is executed 1000 times without becoming a big hit after the big hit is completed. You may.

As a result, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed 1000 times after the big hit is completed, the ball can be entered into the second entry port 640 by right-handing, so that the special symbol 2 can be entered. Lottery can be executed. In the first embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball is entered into the second entry port 640 is 5, but in the case of this modification, the number of prize balls to be paid out is three. It should be configured so as to be. That is, since the number of balls that can be entered into the storage device 600 when hitting right is 1 in 3 balls, by hitting right after the storage valve 607a is opened, the ball can be hit. One out of every three balls can enter the second entrance 640. That is, the special symbol 2 can be drawn while maintaining the ball. With this configuration, even if the lottery of special symbols is repeated without a big hit (even if a so-called big hit occurs), the game is expected to open the storage valve 607a. Can be done. Therefore, the player's motivation for the game can be maintained even if the period during which the jackpot is not reached becomes long. By increasing the number of prize balls paid out when entering the second entry port 640 (for example, 10), after the storage valve 607a is opened, the ball can be hit just by hitting right. It may be configured to increase. With such a configuration, it is possible to further increase the merit when the special symbol lottery is missed 1000 times or more in a row. Therefore, after the big hit is over, we hope that the lottery of special symbols will be a big hit again, and if we continue to lose the lottery of special symbols, we will continue to lose the lottery of special symbols 1000 times or more in a row. I can make you wish. Furthermore, after the storage valve 607a is opened, the number of balls will increase just by hitting the ball to the right. It can be hoped that the state of continuous increase will continue for a long time. Therefore, depending on the number of times the special symbol is drawn, it is possible to make the player wish to be a big hit of the special symbol or to continue to be out of the lottery of the special symbol. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, the storage device 600 is configured to provide only one storage valve 604a, but a plurality of storage valves 604a may be provided. Specifically, the downstream side of the induction flow path 606 may be configured to branch in two directions, and one flow path may be provided with a storage valve that is open only during the special gaming state (during the jackpot state). That is, the same configuration as the guide flow path 606, 607 and the branch member 604 may be further provided on the downstream side of the guide flow path 606. Then, a general winning opening having a large number of prize balls (for example, 15) is provided downstream of the flow path on the side where the storage valve is provided, and the flow path without the storage valve has a small number of prize balls (for example). 3, 3) General prize openings may be provided. With this configuration, a larger number of balls can be stored in the storage device 600, so that a special game state (big hit state) is started and each storage valve is opened to store the balls. The balls that have been played can be flowed down to the general winning opening with a large number of prize balls (for example, 15) all at once. Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one big hit can be increased. Further, instead of providing a plurality of storage valves inside the storage device 600, a plurality of storage devices 600 may be provided in the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13. Even in this configuration, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one big hit can be increased as in the case where a plurality of storage valves are provided.

In the present embodiment, in the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, a storage device 600 is provided downstream of the second entry port 640, and a first variable winning device is provided downstream of the storage device 600. 65 is provided, and the second variable winning device 650 is provided downstream of the first variable winning device 65, but the arrangement is not limited to this, and any arrangement may be used. For example, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 may be arranged on the upstream side of the second ball entrance 640. In the arrangement of the first embodiment, in the special gaming state (big hit state), the ball launched to enter the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650 is the second entry opening first. It may be difficult to enter the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a due to the ball entering the 640, but the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a may be used. By arranging it on the upstream side, it is possible to smoothly acquire the prize ball during the special game state (during the jackpot state).

Further, by arranging the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a on the upstream side and arranging them on the upstream side of the storage device 600, the storage device is placed during the special gaming state (during the jackpot state). It is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball from entering the ball at about 600 and making it difficult for the ball to reach the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, each round in the special game state (during the jackpot state) can proceed more smoothly.

In the present embodiment, the first entry port 64 and the second specific entry opening 640 are provided as the entry openings that trigger the lottery of the special symbol, but either one may be abolished. For example, the second ball entry port 640 may be abolished and an electric accessory 640 may be provided for the first ball entry port 64. As a result, there is less merit in launching the ball into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), so that the anomaly in which the ball is launched aiming at the storage device 600. It is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) a typical game method.

In the present embodiment, when a ball flows into the storage device 600 (balls enter) in a special game state (big hit state), the balls enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, which has many prize balls to be paid out. In addition to this, the number of balls that have entered the general entry port 602 in one special game state (big hit state) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It may be configured to do so. As a result, in the special game state (big hit state), in addition to obtaining a prize ball by winning a prize in the first specific prize opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, how much extra prize ball is obtained. It is possible to make the player recognize whether or not the prize has been created. Therefore, since it is possible to make the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 think that more balls are to be entered, it is possible to have a target for the number of balls to be entered. The number of winnings in the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 does not necessarily have to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a dedicated display device may be provided separately. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the effect during the jackpot state can be executed in a wider display area.

In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out based on the ball entering (winning) the first specific winning opening 65a and the ball entering (winning) the second specific winning opening 650a. The number of prize balls paid out based on the number of prize balls and the number of prize balls paid out based on the balls entering (winning) into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 are all the same number (15). , Not limited to this. For example, the number of prize balls paid out based on the ball entering (winning) the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is transferred to the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a. May be configured to be less than the number of prize balls paid out based on winning (winning) (for example, 10 balls). As a result, even if the ball flows into the storage device 600 as a result of the direction of travel of the ball being biased in the special game state (big hit state), the disadvantage to the hole can be reduced.

Further, contrary to the above, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the balls entering (winning) into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is determined by the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 65a. The number of winning balls may be larger than the number of winning balls paid out based on the balls entering (winning) into the winning opening 650a. Specifically, for example, the number of prize balls paid out by entering (winning) the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a is set to 10, and the general winning opening (high value winning opening). The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters (wins) in 602 may be 15. As a result, the profit that the player can enjoy by flowing the ball into the storage device 600 in the special game state (big hit state) can be increased, so that the player's interest in the big hit game can be further improved. it can.

In the present embodiment, the storage valve 607a is opened based on the start of the jackpot, and the storage valve 607a is closed based on the end of the jackpot. Is not limited to this. It may be set to be opened only for a shorter period than the present embodiment, or it may be configured to repeat the open state and the closed state a plurality of times in the jackpot. For example, the storage valve 607a may be opened based on the interval period set during the jackpot round, and the storage valve 607a may be closed based on the end of the interval period. By limiting the period in which the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (release state) to the interval period, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot from becoming too large. That is, since it is possible to prevent the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player in one big hit from varying, it is possible to easily predict the sales of the pachinko machine 10. Further, by opening the storage valve 607a during the interval period, the storage valve 607a is provided on the right side of the game board 13 during the interval period (that is, the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a are closed). A part of the sphere that has reached the downstream of the path (flow path) can flow into the storage device 600. That is, even during the interval period, the prize ball can be obtained by inserting the ball into the general prize opening 602. Therefore, the ball can be less likely to be wasted even during the interval period.

Further, in the present embodiment, the storage valve 607a is configured to be closed at the start of the ending effect of the jackpot, but it may be configured to be closed at the end of the ending effect. As a result, a part of the balls remaining on the board surface at the start of the ending effect can flow into the storage device 600. That is, the prize ball can be obtained by inserting the ball into the general prize opening 602 during the ending production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from being wasted during the ending effect. Further, the storage valve 607a is left in the open state until a certain period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the ending effect is completed, and the storage valve 607a is closed after a certain period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses. It may be configured to switch to a state. As a result, a part of the balls remaining on the board surface at the end of the ending effect can flow into the storage device 600. That is, the prize ball can be obtained by inserting the ball into the general prize opening 602 after the end of the ending effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from being wasted after the ending effect is completed.

In addition, the storage valve 607a is opened when a game state different from the special game state (big hit state) is set, and the storage valve 607a is changed from the set game state to another game state. May be closed. For example, the storage valve 607a may be configured to be opened during the period in which the probability variation state of the special symbol is set. As a result, in the probable state of the special symbol, while receiving the lottery of the special symbol 2 which is likely to be a big hit B by hitting right, the ball goes to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 with a large number of prize balls to be paid out. Can be entered. Therefore, the probabilistic state of the special symbol can be made more advantageous to the player. Further, the storage valve 607a may be configured to be opened when the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. Basically, the time saving state of the normal symbol is a state in which the player has less merit than the probabilistic state of the special symbol, but the storage valve 607a should be configured to be opened during the time saving state of the normal symbol. For example, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when the time is shortened for the normal symbol.

Further, instead of switching the state of the storage valve 607a according to the game state or the like, or in addition to switching the state of the storage valve 607a according to the game state or the like, the storage valve 607a of the storage valve 607a is switched at an arbitrary timing of the player. It may be configured so that the state can be switched. As a result, each player can play the game in the state of the storage valve 607a according to his / her taste.

In the present embodiment, the out opening is provided inside the storage device 600, but instead of the out opening, a winning opening for paying out the prize balls may be provided. In addition, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter each winning opening may be different. More specifically, for example, 6 prize balls are provided in place of the out port 603a, 10 prize balls are provided in place of the out port 603b, and 10 prize balls are provided in place of the out port 603c. May be provided with 12 winning openings. This makes it possible to observe more interestingly when the ball flows down the guide flow path 606 and to which winning opening the ball enters the guide flow path 607. Further, a member such as a nail that can change the flow direction of the ball may be provided downstream of the guide flow path 606 or the guide flow path 607 so that the winning openings for any of the balls will be more random. .. As a result, when the ball flows into the storage device 600, the whereabouts of the ball can be observed more interestingly until the ball enters one of the winning openings. In addition, by providing a nail or the like, a clerk in the hall can set an entrance for the ball to easily enter. Therefore, the ball ejection rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted on the hall side.

In the present embodiment, the opening and closing of the storage valve 607a are controlled by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve 607a may be controlled by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. More specifically, the solenoid 610 for the storage device may be electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113. Then, the storage valve 607a may be controlled to be switched to the open state when the opening command is received from the main control device 110, and may be controlled to be switched to the closed state when the ending command is received. Thereby, the processing load of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to execute the variable effect selection process, the special symbol lottery process, and the like, which are the main processes related to the game, without delay.

In the present embodiment, the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (release state) in the special game state (big hit state), and the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state (storage state) in a state other than the special game state (big hit state). It was configured to do, but it is not limited to this. For example, the state of the storage valve 604a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of installation days, and the like. In addition, it may be configured to switch based on the result of a lottery held regularly or irregularly. For example, the storage 607a is basically configured to be in the closed state (storage state), and a lottery is configured to execute a lottery as to whether or not to switch to the open state (release state) once a minute. May be good. Further, when the lottery is won, the storage valve 607a may be opened for 10 seconds, for example. As a result, if the lottery is won and the ball can flow into the storage device 600 with the storage valve 607a set to the open state (release state), the ball goes to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. Can be entered, so that the player can play the game with the expectation that he will win more lottery. Further, the lottery probability of whether or not the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (release state) may be adjusted so that the clerk of the hall or the like can adjust it. As a result, when the player selects one machine to play the game from among the plurality of pachinko machines 10, it is possible to predict the machine having a good lottery probability and select the machine. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of the habit of setting the lottery probability of the hall, it is possible to improve the interest of the player at the stage of selecting the machine before starting the game. ..

In this embodiment, depending on the type of jackpot, a jackpot (big hit B) in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened at a timing when it is easy to enter the probability variation entry ball opening 654 in the 12th round of the jackpot, and a probability variation entry ball A jackpot (big hit A) is provided in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened at a timing when it is difficult to enter the mouth 654. It may be configured to suggest whether it is a jackpot type. For example, in each of the 1st to 11th rounds of the jackpot, an ally of justice and a monster may fight each other. Then, if the ally of justice wins by the 11th round, it is notified that it is a jackpot B, and if the ally of justice is defeated, it may be notified that it is a jackpot A. That is, if the ally of justice wins, the player can be made aware that it is an opportunity to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol. This makes it possible for the player to observe the result of the effect performed at the jackpot more interestingly.

In addition, there are variations in the production content, and there is a high possibility that the ally of justice will be defeated (in the case of jackpot A) and the production content that is highly expected to win (easily selected in the case of jackpot B) (Easy to be selected in) may be provided. For example, if the ally of justice attacks the enemy with a special move, or if the ally of justice avoids the attack of the enemy, the expectation of winning is high, and the attack of the ally of justice is missed. It may be configured to increase the possibility of defeat if the enemy attacks with a special move. As a result, not only the result of whether or not the ally of justice wins, but also the result can be predicted by the flow of the production leading to victory or defeat. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the jackpot game.

It should be noted that the content of the production performed by the 11th round is not limited to the above-mentioned production in which the ally of justice and the monster fight, and it can be suggested that the jackpot B is advantageous and the jackpot A is more disadvantageous than the jackpot B. Any aspect may be used. For example, if the boy character 710 searches for the treasure and the treasure can be found by the 11th round, it may be configured to be notified that it is a jackpot B, or the boy character 710 may be configured to search for the treasure. It may be configured to display the effect of eating big eaters and to notify that it is a big hit B when all the provided foods are eaten.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is provided with a storage device 600 having a unique configuration that is not mounted on a general game machine, an effect for explaining the playability related to the storage device 600 is provided. You may. More specifically, for example, the condition that the image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear image and the storage valve 607a is opened, the merit when the storage valve 607a is opened, and the demerit when the ball is hit right in the closed state. It may be configured to display an image (explanatory image) for explaining. Thereby, the player can easily understand the playability. Further, the back type on which the explanatory image is displayed may be configured so that the back type can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. As a result, the player who is accustomed to playing the pachinko machine 10 and fully understands the game playability can change to the back type in which the explanatory image is not displayed.

In the present embodiment, a right-handed hit is performed in a normal state (a low-probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol), and when it is detected that a ball has entered the storage device 600, a right-handed warning image is obtained. Although it was configured to display (see FIG. 5B), it may be configured not to display the right-handed warning image under predetermined conditions. For example, when the player is hitting right in a state where the ball is not stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a, a right-handed warning image (FIG. 5B) until the ball is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a. (See) may be configured not to be displayed. By keeping the ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a in the normal state, it becomes a big hit of the special symbol after that, and when the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (release state), the upper part of the storage valve 607a. The balls stored in the ball can be immediately entered into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. Therefore, the ball paid out by entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 can be used as a ball used for the big hit game. Therefore, even if the ball is exhausted despite the big hit, the big hit game can be performed without borrowing a new ball.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 76. In the first embodiment described above, the storage device 600 is provided upstream of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650, and is arranged inside the storage device 600 in the special gaming state (big hit state). It was configured so that a prize ball could be obtained by inserting a ball into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. That is, in the special game state (big hit state), the prize balls are paid out by inserting the balls into the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, and in addition, the balls are sent to the storage device 600. The prize ball was configured to be paid out by entering the ball. As a result, more prize balls are paid out in the jackpot, and the player's interest in the jackpot game is further improved.

Further, in the first embodiment, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state) (normal gaming state), the ball is closed by closing the upstream of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 by the storage valve 607a. Was configured to make it difficult for the ball to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, and was configured so that the ball could be stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a. Then, when a ball stored inside the storage device 600 exists in the normal gaming state, the stored ball and another ball newly flowing into the storage device 600 can interfere (contact) with each other. It was configured like this. Then, when interference (contact) with the stored balls occurs, the flow direction of the balls newly flowing into the storage device 600 is the direction of the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a small number of winning balls. It was configured to change in the direction of (direction of the induction flow path 606). As a result, by hitting the ball right with the aim of winning the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 of the storage device 600 in the normal game state, it is anomalous to try to increase the number of balls held without going through a big hit. It was configured so that the game method would not be fundamentally valid.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the storage device 700 is provided instead of the storage device 600 in the first embodiment. Then, it is configured so that whether or not the ball is stored in the storage device 700 can be switched by the operation of the player. Further, when the ball is stored in the storage device 700, two flow paths through which the ball can flow down are provided, depending on the flow speed and approach angle of the ball flowing into the storage device 700, the adjustment condition of the nail, and the like. , It is configured so that the sphere can flow into either flow path.

Further, in the second embodiment, there are two flow paths, one is a winning opening for easy entry when the ball is not stored (the state where the storage valve 704a is open) and the other is easy for the ball to flow in when the ball is stored in the storage valve 704a. The two types of winning openings provided downstream of the above are all configured so that the number of winning balls to be paid out is different. That is, the two types of winning openings that can be won when the balls are stored in the storage valve 704a are the winning openings with a large number of winning balls paid out and the winning opening with a small number of winning balls paid out. It is configured as follows. Further, the winning opening where the ball can win in the state where the storage valve 704a is opened is configured to be between the above two types of payout numbers. That is, it is possible to switch between a state in which balls can be entered in both a winning opening with a large number of winning balls and a winning opening with a small number of winning balls, and a state in which balls can be stably received by flowing the balls into the storage device 700. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to switch the playability when the ball is flowed into the storage device 700 according to the preference of the player, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the arrangement of the first variable winning device 65 is below the first ball entry port 64. 2 The variable winning device 650 is abolished, the storage device 700 is provided instead of the storage device 600, and the release button 800 for changing the state of the storage valve 704a to the open state by the operation of the player is provided. The point that the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the configuration is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. A part of the processing is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and a part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. is there. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 62, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball entry port 64. Then, in the first embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 provided in the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 has been abolished. Then, in all rounds of the jackpot, the first specific winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a is configured to be opened. That is, in the special game state (big hit state), the ball can be made to enter the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a by hitting the left side.

Further, in the second embodiment, the storage device 700 is provided in the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13. In this storage device 700, the number of nails around the entrance is smaller than that around the entrance of the storage device 600 of the first embodiment, and the ratio of balls flowing in when hitting right is the storage device of the first embodiment. It is configured to be less than 600 (eg, 1 in 10). Details of the storage device 700 in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 shows an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a probabilistic state of a special symbol or a time saving state of a normal symbol (a period in which the player does not lose even if the player strikes right). It is a figure. FIG. 63 (a) shows the display contents in the state where the release button 800 is not pressed (the state where the storage valve 704a is not opened), and FIG. 63 (b) shows the release button 800 is pressed. The display contents in the state (the state in which the storage valve 704a is open) are shown.

As shown in FIG. 63A, when the release button 800 is not pressed (operated) by the player, the boy character 710 in the first embodiment is placed in the small area Ds2 in the sub-display area Ds (FIG. 5 (FIG. 5). Instead of (see Ds2 in a)), the characters "Press the button to open the gate!" Are displayed. By displaying this character, the player can press the release button 800 (button) to set the storage valve 704a (gate) provided in the storage device 700 to the open state. It can be easily recognized. Since the display contents in the display area other than the small area Ds2 are the same as the probabilistic state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol in the first embodiment, the detailed name description thereof will be omitted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), when the release button 800 is pressed (operated) by the player, the characters "gate is open" are displayed for the small area Ds2. As a result, it is possible to easily recognize that the storage valve 704a (gate) provided in the storage device 700 is in the open state.

Next, the details of the storage device 700 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. First, FIG. 64 is a front view of the storage device 700 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 64, the storage device 700 is provided with a guide flow path 707 for flowing down a ball flowing in from the upper portion thereof, and three flow paths are provided on the downstream side of the guide flow path 707. (The downstream of the induction flow path 707 branches in three directions). Specifically, the guide flow path 706 for causing the inflowing sphere to flow down in the lower left direction in the front view, the guide flow path 704 for flowing down in the downward direction in the front view, and the guide flow path 704 for flowing down in the lower right direction in the front view. A guide flow path 708 for the purpose is provided. As shown in FIG. 64, since the nail 709a and the nail 709b are provided downstream of the guide flow path 705, the ball is to the right or to the left while flowing down the guide flow path 705. Even so, the flow direction of the sphere can be corrected toward the center by passing between the nails 709a and 709b. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed down the guide flow path 705 easily flows into the guide flow path 704 provided on the central side downstream of the guide flow path 705.

Downstream of the induction flow path 706, a general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 having a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out (for example, 6) is provided. Further, downstream of the induction flow path 704, there is a general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 that pays out a smaller number of prize balls (for example, three) than the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702. It is provided. Further, as entry openings other than the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, the out openings 703a to 703e in which the winning ball is not paid out even if the ball enters are It is provided. Then, the game ball that has flowed down the induction flow path 708 enters the out port (small value winning opening) 703d or the out port (small value winning opening) 703e, so that when the ball flows down the induction flow path 708. In addition, there is no merit for the player. A ball that has flowed down the induction flow path 706 but has not entered the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is discharged to the outside by entering the out opening 703a or the out opening 703b. Will be done. Further, a ball that has flowed down the induction flow path 704 but has not entered the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 is discharged to the outside by entering the out opening 703b or the out opening 703c. Will be done. These out ports 703a to 703c prevent (suppress) the balls from accumulating under the storage device 700 even if the balls move irregularly due to vibration or the like, and ensure that the balls are discharged. Can be done.

A storage valve 704a is provided in the induction flow path 704. Similar to the storage valve 607a in the first embodiment, the storage valve 704a closes the induction flow path 704 to store one ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 after the closure in the upper part of the storage valve 704a. be able to. Unlike the storage valve 607a in the first embodiment, the storage valve 704a is configured so that the closed state can be released (set to the open state) by the operation of the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) by the player. Has been done. In the state where the balls are stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704, the flow direction is changed by the impact caused by the balls flowing into the storage device 700 interfering (contacting) with the stored balls. This change (switching) in the flow direction will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 65.

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing the trajectory (flowing direction) of a ball when the ball flowing into the storage device 700 (entering the ball) flows down in a state where the storage valve 704a is closed. First, a case where a sphere that interferes (contacts) with a stored sphere repels the left side of the front view due to the impact of the interference will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 65 (a), when the ball flowing into (entering) the storage device 700 interferes (contacts) with the ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a and repels to the left in the front view. The sphere flows into the induction channel 706 and flows down the induction channel 706. Here, since the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is provided downstream of the induction flow path 706, a relatively large amount of balls enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702. (For example, 6 prize balls) will be paid out. Therefore, if the ball repels to the right, it is advantageous for the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65 (b), a case where the sphere that interferes (contacts) with the stored sphere repels to the right side in the front view due to the impact of the interference will be described. As shown in FIG. 65 (b), when the ball flowing into (entering) the storage device 700 interferes (contacts) with the ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a and repels to the right in the front view. The sphere flows into the induction channel 708 and flows down the induction channel 708. Here, since the out ports (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e are provided downstream of the induction flow path 708, the ball enters either of the out openings. That is, when the ball repels to the right side of the front view, the prize ball is not paid out, so that there is no merit for the player.

As described above, in the state where the storage valve 704a is closed, the number of prize balls (game value) obtained by the player varies depending on the direction in which the balls flowing into (entering) the storage device 700 repel. Therefore, when a ball flows into (enters) the storage device 700, it is expected that the ball will repel to the left in the front view due to interference (contact) with the ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a. You can play a game. That is, since the flow direction (repulsion direction) of the ball flowing into (entering) the storage device 700 can be confirmed more interestingly, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Further, the direction in which the ball is likely to repel changes depending on the momentum of the ball, the angle of entry into the storage device 700, and the adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b, so that the ball easily repels the guide flow path 706 to the player. It is possible to devise a way of hitting so that it becomes. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Further, when selecting the pachinko machine 10 for playing the game, the pachinko machine 10 in which the ball can easily enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is selected in consideration of the adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b. Can be done. Therefore, at the stage of selecting the pachinko machine 10 before starting the game, it is possible to give the pleasure of searching for the pachinko machine 10 that is likely to be advantageous to oneself.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, an operation when a ball flows into (enters) the storage device 700 while the storage valve 704a is set to the open state will be described. When the sphere flows into the storage device 700, the sphere first flows down the induction flow path 705. Since the nails 709a and the nails 709b are provided on the left and right sides of the guide flow path 705 (see FIG. 66), the ball is to the right or left while flowing down the guide flow path 705. Even so, the flow direction of the sphere can be corrected toward the center by passing between the nails 709a and 709b. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed down the guidance flow path 705 flows into the guidance flow path 704 provided on the central side downstream of the guidance flow path 705.

When the storage valve 704a is open, the sphere can flow down the induction flow path 704. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed into the induction flow path 704 flows down the induction flow path 704 to the downstream, and the general winning opening (middle). Value winning opening) Enter 701. As a result, a smaller number (for example, 3) of prize balls than the prize balls for entering the general prize opening (high value winning opening) 702 is paid out.

In this way, in the state where the storage valve 704a is opened, the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 enters the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701. That is, the flow direction does not change due to repulsion and does not flow into the guide flow path 706 or the guide flow path 708. That is, instead of being unable to enter the ball into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, which has a large number of winning balls, the ball enters the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e. There is no chance that you will not be able to get the prize ball. Therefore, when the ball is put into the storage device 700, the prize ball can be stably obtained, so that the player can have a sense of security.

Further, in the present embodiment, the player can operate the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) to set the storage valve 704a to the open state while the operation is being performed. That is, by leaving the storage valve 704a in the closed state, there is a possibility that a ball will enter any of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d and 703e. It can be in a state (a state of high gambling in which a large number of prize balls may be obtained, but a prize ball may not be obtained). Further, by setting the storage valve 704a to the open state, the ball flowing into the storage device 700 can be entered into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 (a small amount but stable). It is possible to obtain a prize ball). Therefore, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched by the player depending on whether or not the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) is operated, so that each player selects the playability that suits his or her own taste. You can play the game.

<About the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. The electrical configuration in the second embodiment is different from the electrical configuration in the first embodiment in that the provisions of the random number table 202b per first of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 are changed, and the configuration of the RAM 203 is one. The part has been changed, the release button 800 is electrically connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110, and the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. It differs in that. Since the other electrical configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 67, the release button 800 is electrically connected to the input / output port 205. The release button 800 is arranged at a position (for example, around the frame button 22) where the player can arbitrarily press (operate). When the release button 800 is pressed (operated) by the player, a signal (pressing detection signal) for notifying the MPU 201 that the pressing has been detected is output to the input / output port 205. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 controls the solenoid 610 for the storage device so as to open the storage valve 704a based on the pressing detection signal. That is, the solenoid 610 for the storage device is set to ON.

Next, the first type selection table 202b provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 68 (a). The first hit type selection table 202b is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored, as in the first hit type selection table 202b in the first embodiment.

In the first hit type selection table 202b in the present embodiment, the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with only each jackpot type. That is, unlike the first embodiment, the value of the same first hit type counter C2 is the same regardless of whether the lottery of the special symbol 1 is a big hit or the lottery of the special symbol 2 is a big hit. The jackpot types are associated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), the jackpot C is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 49” (FIG. 68 (a). ) 202b1). The jackpot C is a jackpot in which the special gaming state (big hit state) continues for 15 rounds. In addition, after the end of the jackpot C, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given as an added value (the state shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol). In addition, the time saving state of the normal symbol given after the end of the jackpot C continues until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times.

On the other hand, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99", the jackpot D is associated and defined (see 202b2 in FIG. 68 (a)). The jackpot D is a jackpot in which the special gaming state (big hit state) continues for 15 rounds. In addition, after the end of the jackpot D, the probabilistic state of the special symbol of the special symbol is given as an added value (shifts to the probabilistic state of the special symbol). In addition, the probability variation state of the special symbol given after the end of the jackpot D continues until the next jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is predetermined depending on the winning jackpot type. That is, a configuration more general than that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is adopted. Along with this, in the second embodiment, the specified contents of the first type selection table 202b are changed.

Next, the defined contents of the RAM 203 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 68 (b). As shown in FIG. 68B, the RAM 203 in the second embodiment has a probability variation setting flag 203h, a probability variation passage counter 203i, a winning number counter 203j, an operation counter 203k, and a remaining ball provided in the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. The timer flag 203m, the remaining ball timer 203n, the probability variation effective flag 203o, the probability variation effective timer 203p, and the discharge number counter 203q have been deleted. This is because these configurations are provided in connection with determining whether or not to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit in the second specific winning device 650. That is, in the present embodiment, the gaming state to be set at the end of the jackpot is determined in advance according to the jackpot type, and whether or not to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol during the special gaming state (during the jackpot state). Since no determination is made, it is not necessary to use each of the above configurations in this embodiment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 68B, the RAM 203 in the second embodiment is provided with the release flag 203s. The release flag 203s indicates whether or not the player presses (operates) the release button 800 and the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (whether or not the state in which the ball can be stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 704a is released). Is a flag indicating). The release flag 203s is set to ON when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched from the closed state to the open state (see S4008 in FIG. 71). On the other hand, when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched from the open state to the closed state, it is set to off (see S4004 in FIG. 71).

Next, returning to FIG. 67, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 67, in the RAM 223 of the present embodiment, the winning count counter 223j provided in the RAM 223 of the first embodiment is abolished, and a storage state flag 223k and a flow-down time counter 223k are added. There is.

The storage state flag 223k is a flag indicating whether or not the storage valve 704a is set to the open (released) state. When the storage state flag 223k is on, it indicates that the storage valve 704a is closed and the ball can be stored in the upper part thereof. On the other hand, when the storage state flag 223k is off, the storage valve 704a is set to the open (released) state, indicating that the ball can flow down the induction flow path 704. Each time the storage state flag 223k is received from the main control device 110, the storage state flag 223k is updated to a value corresponding to the storage state indicated by the command (see S1922 in FIG. 72). The voice lamp control device 113 determines the setting of the storage valve 704a based on the storage state flag 223k, and determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the storage valve 704a.

In the flow-down time counter 223k, a ball that has flowed into the induction flow path 704, the induction flow path 706, or the induction flow path 708 immediately before switching the state of the storage valve 704a is one of the entry ports (general winning opening 701, general winning opening). It is a counter for counting the time (ball ejection time) until the ball enters the mouth 702, the out mouth 703d, or the out mouth 703e). By counting the ball brushing period, the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701, the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, or the out opening (small value winning opening) When a ball enters the winning opening) 703e, it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not the entry is a normal operation. The flow-down time counter 233k is set with a counter value corresponding to 1 second each time a storage state command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1923 in FIG. 72). Further, each time the main process (see FIG. 42) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the value is subtracted by 1.

In the present embodiment, with the storage valve 704a closed, a ball enters the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 provided downstream of the storage valve 704a, or the storage valve 704a is opened. If a ball enters the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703e in the state, a warning image (Fig. 7 (Fig. 7 (Fig. 7)) b) See) is configured to be displayed. However, if the ball flows into the induction flow path 704 immediately before the storage valve 704a switches from the open state to the closed state, the ball becomes a general winning opening (medium value) after the storage valve 704a switches to the closed state. Winning opening) There is a case where the ball enters 701. Similarly, if a ball flows into the induction flow path 706 or the induction flow path 708 immediately before the storage valve 704a switches from the closed state to the open state, the ball is generally used after the storage valve 704a switches to the open state. There are cases where the ball enters the winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703e. In order to treat these as normal ball entry (not to display the warning image), in the present embodiment, when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched, the flow time counter 233k is set to a predetermined period (1 second). Set the corresponding counter value. Then, until one second set as the counter value elapses, the ball is a general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701, a general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, an out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, or When the ball enters the out opening (small value winning opening) 703e, it is determined that the operation is normal (the warning image is not displayed).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. In the present embodiment, the content of the main process (see FIG. 69) is changed from the first embodiment. In the following, only the various processes executed in the main process (see FIG. 69) will be described, and the detailed description of the other processes not changed from the first embodiment will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 69, the main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this main process. Similar to the first embodiment, in this main process, the main process of the game is executed.

In the main process (see FIG. 69) in the present embodiment, the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 70) is replaced with the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) with respect to the main process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment. Is different in that is executed. Another difference is that the storage control process (S1022) for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 704a is executed after the second symbol display update process (S1007) is completed. Another difference is that the error command process 2 (S1023) is executed instead of the error command process (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment. Since the other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the jackpot control process 2 (S1021) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 2 (S1021). This jackpot control process 2 (S1021) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 69), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state (big hit state), various effects according to the jackpot are executed, and the first 1 This is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a.

In each of the jackpot control processes 2 (S1021), S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, and S1109, S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, and S1109 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. The same process as each process of is executed. Further, in the jackpot control process 2 in the present embodiment, the process of S1103 (process for setting the opening of the storage valve) in the first embodiment is abolished. In the second embodiment, since the storage valve 704a is set to the open state based on the player operating the release button 800, the state of the storage valve 704a regardless of whether or not it is in the special gaming state (big hit state). This is because is switched.

Further, in the jackpot control process 2 in the present embodiment, when it is determined by the process of S1105 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the first specific winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a Opening is set (S1121), a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1122), and this process is terminated. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1105, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1123). ). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a, or when the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a has passed. When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are won after opening the box, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1123, when it is determined that the closing condition of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1123: Yes), the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is opened. It is closed (S1124) to end this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the first specific winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1123: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109). Specifically, when the 15 rounds of the special game state (big hit state) are completed, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect.

In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: Yes), first, the ending command is set (S1125). The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of S1125 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the current jackpot is a jackpot D (probability variation jackpot) (S1126), and if it is determined that the jackpot is not a jackpot D (that is, a jackpot C) (S1126: No), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r is set to 100 (S1127), and this process is terminated. By setting 100 to the time-saving medium counter 203r, it is possible to set the time-saving period of the normal symbol until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times after the end of the big hit.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1126, when it is determined that the current jackpot is the jackpot D (probability variation jackpot), the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON in order to give the probability variation state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot (probability variation jackpot). S1128), this process is terminated. Further, in the process of S1109, if it is not the ending start timing (S1109: No), the present process is terminated. That is, the winning process (S1111, see FIG. 38) and the abnormality process (S1112, see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment are not executed in the jackpot control process 2 of the present embodiment.

By making the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 70) different from the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment as described above, only one winning opening is provided during the jackpot. The present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine (that is, a more general pachinko machine) in which the state after the end of the jackpot is predetermined according to the jackpot type.

Next, the storage control process (S1022) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing this storage control process (S1022). As described above, this storage control process (S1022) is a process for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 704a.

In the storage control process, first, it is determined whether or not the release flag 203s is ON (S4001), and if it is determined that it is ON (S4001: Yes), the storage valve 704a is opened (storage device 700). Since the state in which the ball can be stored is released), it is then determined whether or not the player presses (operates) the release button 800 (S4002). That is, it is determined whether or not the pressing detection signal is detected.

In the process of S4002, when it is determined that the press (operation) of the release button 800 is detected (that is, the press detection signal is detected) (S4002: Yes), in order to keep the storage valve 704a in the open state, This process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the release button 800 is not detected (that is, the pressing detection signal is not detected) (S4002: No), the storage valve 704a is closed in order to close the storage device. The solenoid 610 is set to off (S4003). Then, in order to indicate that the storage valve 704a is closed, the release flag 203s is set to off (S4004), and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified that the storage valve 704a is in the closed state. Therefore, a storage state command corresponding to the closed state of the storage valve 704a is set (S4005), and this process is terminated.

The storage state mand set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the storage state command corresponding to the closed state, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a display rear image change command for setting the back type corresponding to the closed state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the rear image based on the display rear image change command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63A, the character "When the button is pressed, the gate is opened!" Is displayed for the small area Ds2. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the storage valve 704a can be set to the open state by pressing the release button 800.

On the other hand, in the process of S4001, when it is determined that the release flag 203s is off (S4001: No), the storage valve 704a is closed (a state in which the ball can be stored in the storage device 700 is set). Next, it is determined whether or not the player presses (operates) the release button 800 (S4006). That is, it is determined whether or not the pressing detection signal is detected.

If it is determined in the process of S4006 that the press (operation) of the release button 800 is not detected (that is, the press detection signal is not detected) (S4006: No), the storage valve 704a is kept in the closed state. In order to keep it, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the press (operation) of the release button 800 is detected (that is, the press detection signal is detected) (S4006: Yes), the solenoid 610 for the storage device is turned on in order to open the storage valve 704a. Is set to (S4007). Then, in order to indicate that the storage valve 704a is set to be open, the release flag 203s is set to ON (S4008), and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified that the storage valve 704a is in the open state. Therefore, a storage state command corresponding to the open state of the storage valve 704a is set (S4009), and this process is terminated.

The storage state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the storage state command corresponding to the release state, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a display rear image change command for setting the back type corresponding to the release state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the rear image based on the display rear image change command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the character "gate is open" is displayed for the small area Ds2. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the storage valve 704a is in the open state.

By executing this storage control process, opening or closing of the storage valve 704a can be set according to the operation status of the release button 800. As a result, by storing the ball in the upper part of the storage valve 704a at an arbitrary timing of the player, either the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 or the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d or 703e It is possible to switch between a state in which a crab ball enters and a state in which a ball that has flowed into (entered) the storage device 700 flows down toward a general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 114 in the second embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the content of the command determination process (see FIG. 72) is partially changed from the command determination process (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, only the command determination process (see FIG. 72) will be described, and detailed description of other processes that have not been changed from the first embodiment will be omitted.

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the command determination process (1811) in the present embodiment. In this command determination process, in each of the processes S1901 to S1911 and S1913 to S1919, the same processes as those of S1901 to S1911 and S1913 to S1919 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment are performed. Each is executed.

Further, in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received in the process of S1911 (S1911: Yes), the presence or absence of a defect such as a failure is determined in the storage valve 704a. Then, a warning process for giving a warning when a problem has occurred is executed (S1921), and this process is terminated.

Further, in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the present embodiment, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received in the process of S1916 (S1916: No), then whether or not the storage state command has been received is determined. Determined (S1922). Then, when it is determined that the storage status command has been received (S1922: Yes), the storage status flag 223k is updated according to the status of the storage valve 704a notified by the storage status command (S1923). Specifically, when the closed state (storage state) is notified as the state of the storage valve 704a, the storage state flag 223k is set to ON, and the open state (release state) is notified as the state of the storage valve 704a. If so, the storage status flag 223k is set to off. When the storage status flag 223k is updated, the rear image (see FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b)) corresponding to the updated storage status is also set to display the third symbol display device 81. Update the content.

When the processing of S1923 is completed, a counter value corresponding to 1 second is set for the flow-down time counter 223l (S1924), and this processing is completed. By using the ball flushing time set for the flow-down time counter 223l, it is possible to accurately determine the presence or absence of a defect in the storage valve 704a. If it is determined in the process of S1922 that the storage state command has not been received (S1922: No), the process shifts to S1919.

As described above, in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the present embodiment, the state of the storage valve 704a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the release state command and the closed state command from the main control device 110. A command for causing the display control device 114 can be set. As a result, the player can easily recognize the state of the storage valve 704a.

Next, the warning process (S1921) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 73. As described above, this warning process (S1921) is a process for determining the presence or absence of a defect such as a failure in the storage valve 704a and giving a warning when a failure occurs.

In the warning process (S1921), first, it is determined whether or not the storage state flag 223k is on (S4101), if it is on (S4101: Yes), and then whether the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is 0. Whether or not it is determined (S4102). When it is determined that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is 0 (S4102: Yes), the storage valve 704a is set to the closed state (storage state), which means that the ball-draining period has elapsed. Therefore, in the closed state (storage state) of the storage valve 704a, a storage time notification process for notifying a defect is executed (S4103), and this process is terminated. Further, when it is determined that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is not 0 in the processing of S4102 (S4102: No), it means that the ball-brushing period associated with setting the storage valve 704a to the closed state is currently in progress. Therefore, the process of S4103 is skipped, and the main process is terminated as it is.

Here, the details of the above-mentioned storage notification process (S4103) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 74. In the storage notification process (S4103), first, it is determined whether or not the notified winning information command includes the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 (S4201). If the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 is not included (S4201: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 is included (S4201: Yes), the storage valve 704a is set to the closed state (storage state). Regardless, it means that the ball flows down the downstream of the storage valve 704a and enters the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701. That is, it means that the storage valve 704a is not normally closed even though the storage valve 704a is set to be closed. Therefore, a display error command corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 704a is set (S4202). , End this process.

The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving this display error command, the display control device 114 provides a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 704a of the third symbol display device 81 has a problem. Is displayed. By displaying this warning image (see FIG. 7B), the player or the clerk in the hall can easily be made aware of the occurrence of the defect, so that the defect can be quickly resolved.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 73. In the processing of S4101, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not on (that is, it is off) (S4101: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is 0 (S4104). If it is determined that the value is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S4104: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is 0 (S4104: Yes), the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (release state), which means that the ball-draining period has elapsed. Therefore, in the open state (release state) of the storage valve 704a, a release notification process for notifying a defect is executed (S4105), and this process ends. The release notification process (S4105) will be described with reference to FIG. 75.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the release notification process (S4105). In this release notification process (S4105), first, it is determined whether or not the received winning information command includes the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 (S4301). If the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is included (S4301: Yes), the process shifts to S4303.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4301 that the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is not included (S4301: No), then the winning information command is issued. It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the entry to the mouth (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e is included (S4302), and the entry to the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e is supported. If the winning information is not included (S4302: No), this process ends as it is.

If it is determined in the processing of S4302 that the winning information corresponding to the entry into the out openings (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e is included (S4302: Yes), the processing is shifted to S4303. When the winning information command includes winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 (S4301: Yes), or to the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e. In the processing of S4303 executed when the winning information corresponding to the winning ball is included (S4302: Yes), a display error command corresponding to the defect of the storage valve 704a is set (S4303), and this processing is performed. finish. When the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (released state), the ball flowing into the storage device 700 flows down the induction flow path 704, so that the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 or out The reason why the ball enters the mouth (small value winning mouth) 703d, 703e is that there is a high possibility that the storage valve 704a is not normally opened.

The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving this display error command, the display control device 114 provides a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 704a of the third symbol display device 81 has a problem. Is displayed. By displaying this warning image (see FIG. 7B), the player or the clerk in the hall can easily be made aware of the occurrence of the defect, so that the defect can be quickly resolved.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is provided with a storage device 700 capable of storing balls inside the pachinko machine 10. The storage device 700 is provided with a plurality of flow paths (guidance flow paths 704, 706, 708) inside the storage device 700, and is configured so that the ball can flow down to different entry ports. Further, the induction flow path 704 is provided with a storage valve 704a capable of closing the flow path. When the induction flow path 704 is closed by the storage valve 704a, one ball can be stored (held) in the upper part thereof.

Further, in the state where the storage valve 704a is opened, the ball flowing into the storage device 700 flows down the guide flow path 704 (compared to the guide flow path 706 and the guide flow path 708, to the guide flow path 704). Since it is configured so that the ball can easily flow in), the ball can be entered into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 provided downstream of the induction flow path 704. Therefore, by flowing the balls into the storage device 700, it is possible to stably receive the payout of the prize balls based on the balls entering the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701.

On the other hand, when the storage valve 704a is closed and the spheres are stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 704a, the spheres that have flowed into the storage device 700 interfere (contact) with the stored spheres, so that the induction flow path 706, Alternatively, it repels in any direction of the induction flow path 708. That is, either the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, which has a large number of winning balls paid out due to the change in the flow direction due to repulsion, or the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e, in which the winning balls are not paid out. Enter the crab. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game while expecting the ball to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a holding device for temporarily holding a ball launched onto a game board. In this conventional gaming machine, the held ball can be discharged to the gaming board by the operation of the player, and the ball can be entered into a predetermined winning opening provided in the traveling direction (the ball can be entered into a predetermined winning opening provided in the traveling direction). For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-190443).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest of the player because the ball released by using the holding device is only entered into a predetermined winning opening.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the player can operate the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) to set the storage valve 704a to the open state while the operation is being performed. That is, by leaving the storage valve 704a in the closed state, there is a possibility that a ball will enter any of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d and 703e. It can be in a state (a state of high gambling in which a large number of prize balls may be obtained, but a prize ball may not be obtained). Further, by setting the storage valve 704a to the open state, the ball flowing into the storage device 700 can be entered into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 (a small amount but stable). It is possible to obtain a prize ball). Therefore, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched by the player depending on whether or not the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) is operated, so that each player selects the playability that suits his or her own taste. You can play the game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the present embodiment, the state of the storage valve 704a can be switched by the release button 800 at an arbitrary timing of the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of installation days, and the like. As a result, each player can start the game during the period when the storage valve 704a is in a state suitable for his / her taste. Further, the state of the storage valve 704a may be configured to be switched based on the result of a lottery performed periodically or irregularly. For example, the storage valve 704a is configured to be basically in the closed state (storage state), and a lottery is configured to execute a lottery as to whether or not to switch to the open state (release state) once a minute. You may.

Further, when the lottery is won, the storage valve 704a may be opened for 10 seconds, for example. As a result, if the adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b makes it easier for the ball to enter the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d and 703e in the state where the storage valve 704a is closed, the ball is stored by lottery. The game can be performed with the expectation that the valve 704a will be opened. On the other hand, if the adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b makes it easier for the ball to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 in the state where the storage valve 704a is closed, the ball continues to be out of the lottery. The game can be performed with the expectation that the storage valve 704a will continue to be closed. Further, the lottery probability of whether or not the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (release state) may be adjusted so that the clerk of the hall or the like can adjust it. As a result, when the player selects one machine to play the game from among the plurality of pachinko machines 10, it is possible to predict the machine having a good lottery probability and select the machine. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of the habit of setting the lottery probability of the hall, it is possible to improve the interest of the player at the stage of selecting the machine before starting the game. ..

In the present embodiment, there are two types of flow paths through which the ball can flow when the storage valve 704a is closed: the guidance flow path 706 and the guidance flow path 708, but the present invention is not limited to this. More channels and winning openings may be provided. In addition, more variations may be given to the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters each winning opening. As a result, when the storage valve 704a is closed, the randomness of the number of prize balls that can be obtained can be increased, so that the player can observe the flow direction of the balls that have entered the storage device 700 more interestingly. Can be made to.

Further, a plurality of flow paths through which the ball can flow down when the storage valve 704a is open may be provided. Then, when each flow path flows down, a different number of prize balls may be provided to be paid out. As a result, even when the storage valve 704a is open, the number of prize balls to be paid out can be given randomness, so that the player can see the flow direction of the balls entering the storage device 700. Can be observed more interestingly.

In the present embodiment, the storage device 700 is provided downstream of the second entry port 640, but the arrangement may be reversed. By providing the storage device 700 upstream, the ball can be easily flowed into the storage device 700.

In the present embodiment, only the first specific winning opening 65a is provided as the winning opening opened in the special gaming state (big hit state), but a plurality of winning openings may be provided as in the first embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the storage valve 704a is configured to be opened only during the period in which the release button 800 is pressed (operated), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the press (operation) of the release button 800 is detected, the storage valve 704a may be set to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In this case, the operation of the release button 800 may not be accepted during the predetermined period when the storage valve 704a is open. This eliminates the need to keep pressing the release button 800 in order to keep the storage valve 704a open. Further, each time the release button 800 is pressed (operated), the closed state (storage state) and the open state (release state) may be switched. With this configuration, the release button 800 only needs to be operated when it is desired to switch the state, so that the number of operations by the player can be reduced. Further, contrary to the release button 800, an operating means for closing the storage valve 704a by operating the button 800 may be provided. Even with this configuration, as in the present embodiment, each player can be made to select a game property that suits his or her own taste.

In the present embodiment, the state of the storage valve 704a is displayed by characters in the small area Ds2 in the sub-display area Ds, but the mode of notifying the player of the state of the storage valve 704a is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, depending on the state of the storage valve 704a, either a live-action image in a state in which the storage valve 704a is open or a live-action image in a closed state may be displayed. Further, the display indicating the state of the storage valve 704a may be displayed in a display area other than the small area Ds2. Further, in the present embodiment, the display showing the state of the storage valve 704a is configured to be displayed as a rear image, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be displayed on the front side of the third symbol. Further, the mode of the third symbol may be changed according to the state of the storage valve 704a, and the state of the storage valve 704a may be recognized according to the mode of the third symbol.

In the present embodiment, the opening and closing of the storage valve 704a is controlled by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve 704a may be controlled by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. More specifically, the solenoid 610 for the storage device may be electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113. Then, the storage valve 704a may be controlled to be switched to the open state when the release state command is received from the main control device 110, and may be controlled to be switched to the closed state when the closed state command is received. Thereby, the processing load of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to execute the variable effect selection process, the special symbol lottery process, and the like, which are the main processes related to the game, without delay.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is provided with a storage device 700 having a unique configuration that is not mounted on a general game machine, an effect for explaining the playability related to the storage device 700 is provided. You may. More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 700 is displayed as a rear image, and an image (explanatory image) explaining the conditions under which the storage valve 704a is opened and the advantages and disadvantages when the storage valve 704a is opened is displayed. It may be configured as follows. Thereby, the player can easily understand the playability. Further, the back type on which the explanatory image is displayed may be configured so that the back type can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. As a result, the player who is accustomed to playing the pachinko machine 10 and fully understands the game playability can change to the back type in which the explanatory image is not displayed.

In the present embodiment, the first specific winning opening 65a is provided below the front view of the first winning opening 64 so that the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a by hitting the left side, but this is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the first specific winning opening 65a may be provided downstream of the storage device 700 as in the first embodiment. As a result, the ball can flow into the first specific winning opening 65a and the storage device 700 simply by hitting right in the special game state (big hit state), so that the prize ball in the special game state (big hit state) can be played. Can be more. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the jackpot.

In the present embodiment, when the ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a and the ball newly flowing into the storage device 700 interfere (contact), the flow path through which the newly flowing ball flows down is It was configured to be random. That is, in a state where the balls are stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a, the ratio of the balls newly flowing into the storage device 700 to be distributed to the guide flow path 706 and the guide flow path 708 is substantially the same. It was configured, but not limited to this. For example, the width of the storage valve 704a is widened (for example, 1.5 times the diameter of the sphere), and the sphere stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a is positioned to the right side of the front view or to the left side of the front view. It may be configured to obtain. When the sphere is arranged on the upper part of the storage valve 704a on the left side of the front view, the sphere newly flowing into the storage device 700 tends to collide with the right side surface of the stored sphere. Therefore, the sphere newly flowing into the storage device 700 is likely to be repelled to the right side in the front view, so that the sphere is likely to flow down the induction flow path 708. As described above, since the out ports (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e are provided downstream of the induction flow path 708, the player cannot win the prize ball (which is disadvantageous to the player). .. On the other hand, when the sphere is arranged on the upper part of the storage valve 704a on the right side of the front view, the sphere newly flowing into the storage device 700 tends to collide with the left side surface of the stored sphere. Therefore, the sphere newly flowing into the storage device 700 is likely to be repelled to the left side in the front view, so that the sphere is likely to flow down the induction flow path 706. As described above, since the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is provided downstream of the induction flow path 708, the player can obtain a relatively large amount of prize balls (advantageous for the player). Will be). In this way, the arrangement of the balls stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a can form an advantageous state and a disadvantageous state for the player. Therefore, the storage valve 704a is in a state where the storage valve 704a is closed. It is possible to be aware of the arrangement of the spheres stored in the upper part of the. Therefore, if the arrangement of the spheres is unfavorable (that is, if the spheres are stored to the left of the front view), the storage valve 704a can be released (released) by pressing (operating) the release button 800. it can. Further, if the arrangement of the balls is advantageous (that is, if the balls are stored on the right side of the front view), the player can be made to want to continue the game while maintaining the arrangement of the balls. .. Therefore, it is possible to give the enjoyment of determining whether or not to press the release button 800 according to the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Modified example of the first embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 85. In the first embodiment described above, the state of the second specific winning opening 650a (open state or closed state) and the state of the storage valve 607a provided in the storage device 600 (open state or closed state) are independent of each other. The storage valve 607a is controlled to be always open in the privilege game state (big hit state), while the second specific winning opening 650a is set for a predetermined period in 12 rounds (FIG. 16). It was configured to be set to the open state only during the open period specified for each jackpot type shown in. Further, two types of flow paths (guidance flow path 652 and guidance flow path 653) are provided inside the second variable winning device 650, and the guidance thereof is performed only when the sphere flows down the guidance flow path 652. It was configured so that the ball could enter the probabilistic entry ball opening 654 provided downstream of the flow path 652. That is, even if a ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a during the jackpot, it is configured so that the ball does not shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends unless the ball flows down the induction flow path 652. It was.

On the other hand, in the present modification, the second specific winning opening 650a and the storage are provided by using the slide member 900 instead of the member for opening and closing the second specific winning opening 650a of the first embodiment and the storage valve 607a. The state of the device 600 can be switched. That is, it is configured so that the opening / closing operation of the second specific winning opening 650a and the opening / closing control of the induction flow path 607 in the storage device 600 can be performed by one member, and the states are switched in conjunction with each other. That is, when the second specific winning opening 650a is opened, the guidance flow path 607 (general winning opening 602) is also opened, and when the second specific winning opening 650a is closed, the guidance flow path 607 (general winning opening 602) is also opened. ) Is also configured to be closed. When configured in this way, both the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening 602 (that is, the winning opening opened during the jackpot by the slide member 900) are both winning openings for obtaining a winning ball during the jackpot. Can be treated as.

Further, inside the second variable winning device 650, only the guide flow path 652 leading to the probabilistic entry ball port 654 is provided, and the flow path switching valve 650d, the guide flow path 653, and the normal ball entry port 655 are provided. Is obsolete. That is, if the ball can be inserted into the second specific winning opening 650a, it is configured to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit. In addition, it is configured to change the winning opening opened in the 12th round according to the jackpot type. That is, in the 12th round, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 are set to be open (V route open jackpot), and the first specific in all rounds of the jackpot. The winning opening 65a is set to the open state (the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 are not opened during the jackpot). The jackpot (V route closed jackpot) is provided. Has been done.

With these changes from the first embodiment, the conditions for ending each round of jackpots have also changed. Specifically, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds of the jackpot, a ball that has entered the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. Is changed to 10 in total, or when 30 seconds have passed since the start of the round, the round game ends (the first specific winning opening 65a is closed). Further, in the 12th round, the total number of balls that have entered the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 will be 10 or the round. It is changed so that the round game ends (the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening 602 are closed) when 30 seconds have passed since the start of the game.

The pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the first embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in terms of configuration with a member for switching the state of the second specific winning opening 650a (closed portion 910). , The point that the member (ball storage portion 920) for switching the state of the induction flow path 607 is composed of one member (slide member 900), and is paid out when the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. The number of prize balls to be played is changed to 3 (15 in the first embodiment), the contents of ROM 202 are partially changed, and some processing executed by MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is performed. Is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and some processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 76, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, an example of an image (effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the 12th round of the V route open jackpot (big hit F). explain. As shown in FIG. 76, in the 12 rounds of the V route open jackpot (big hit F), the characters "ROUND 12" are displayed in the display area 714 for displaying the number of rounds. Further, a display area 717 for notifying that the second specific winning opening 650a has been opened is formed on the upper center of the front view of the third symbol display device 81. In this display area 717, the characters "CHANGE !!" and the characters "Probability change route is being opened !!" are displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the ball is inserted into the second specific winning opening 650a to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit. Since other display contents such as the boy character 710 are the same as the display contents displayed on the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 6A), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the configuration on the downstream side of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 will be described. As shown in FIG. 77, on the downstream side of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, the storage device 600, the first variable winning device 65, and the second are the same as in the first embodiment. A variable winning device 650 is provided. Further, a member for opening or closing the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 (closed portion 910) and a member for opening or closing the flow path of the storage device 600 (ball storage portion 920). Are arranged so as to line up in a straight line. Details will be described later, because the closed portion 910 and the ball storage portion 920 are both part of the slide member.

Further, a nail 921a and a nail 921b are provided at the entrance portion of the storage device 600. The hall clerk can adjust the rate at which the balls flow into the storage device 600, for example, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b before the hall opens. By changing the ratio of balls flowing into the storage device 600, it is possible to change the number of balls entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the storage device 600 in the 12th round of the jackpot. it can. Therefore, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so that the ball launched by right-handed hitting easily flows into the storage device 600, it is possible to increase the prize balls that the player can obtain in the big hit. Therefore, since the player's expectation for the jackpot game can be further improved, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

On the contrary, when the nails 921a and 921b are adjusted to make it difficult for the ball to flow into the storage device 600, the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 65a provided downstream of the storage device 600 and the second It is possible to increase the number of balls that reach the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, the jackpot can be digested more quickly. In addition, since it is easy to enter the ball into the second specific winning opening 650a in the 12th round, it is possible to easily shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol when the jackpot F is reached. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the jackpots will continue in a short period of time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The configuration for adjusting the ease with which the ball flows into the storage device 600 (the ease with which the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a) is not limited to the nail. For example, a wind turbine may be provided at the entrance of the storage device 600 so that the ease of rotation can be adjusted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the slide member 900 including the closed portion 910 and the ball storage portion 920 described above in the configuration will be described. 78 (a) and 78 (b) are cross-sectional views when the game board 13 is cut along the line LXXVIIb-LXXVIIb in FIG. 77, respectively. Here, the slide member 900 is configured to be slidably displaced toward the back side or the front side of the front view with respect to the game board 13, and is second specified by being slid and displaced toward the front side of the front view. The winning opening 650a and the induction flow path 607 can be closed, respectively. On the other hand, by sliding the slide member 900 toward the back side of the front view with respect to the game board 13, the second specific winning opening 650a and the guide flow path 607 can be opened, respectively.

FIG. 78 (a) is a view when the second specific winning opening 650a and the guide flow path 607 are closed by the slide member 900 and viewed from above of the game board 13. On the other hand, FIG. 78 (b) is a view when the second specific winning opening 650a and the guide flow path 607 are opened, respectively, when viewed from above the game board 13.

As shown in FIG. 78 (a), the slide member 900 has a shape in which a substantially rectangular closing portion 910 and a ball storage portion 920 protrude from the right end portion and the left end portion of the substantially rectangular base portion 930, respectively (substantially "". It has a U-shaped shape). The closing portion 910 and the ball storage portion 920 may be projected toward the front side of the game board 13 or buried in the back side of the game board 13 via the opening portions 940a and 940b made in the base plate 60, respectively. can do.

In a state where the slide member 900 is slidably displaced toward the front side of the front view, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the upper portion of the second specific winning opening 650a is closed by the closing portion 910, so that the ball is secondly variable. It becomes impossible to enter the ball into the inside of the winning device 650. Similarly, since the guide flow path 607 is closed by the ball storage unit 920, it is possible to allow the ball to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 provided downstream of the guidance flow path 607. become unable.

As shown in FIG. 78 (b), when the slide member 900 is slidably displaced toward the back side of the game board 13, the upper portion of the second variable winning device 650 is opened and the guide flow path 607 is also opened. Therefore, by hitting the ball to the right, the ball goes to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 provided downstream of the induction flow path 607 and the second specific winning opening 650a provided downstream of the storage device 600. Can be entered.

As described above, in this modification, the state switching of the second specific winning opening 650a and the state switching of the induction flow path 607 can be realized only by the slide member 900. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where the second specific winning opening 650 and the storage valve 607a are controlled separately as in the first embodiment. That is, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced. In particular, since the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes important processing in the game such as drawing a special symbol and determining the fluctuation time, if the processing speed decreases due to an increase in the processing load, The influence on the game will be large. On the other hand, in this modification, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced by introducing the slide member 900, so that the main processing in the game can be executed more reliably.

<About the electrical configuration in the modified example of the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the first type selection table 202b in this modification will be described. As described above, in the present modification, when the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a, the ball always enters the probabilistic entry opening 654. Then, as a jackpot type, a jackpot in which the second specific winning opening 650 is opened in the 12th round and a jackpot in which the first specific winning opening 65a is opened in the 12th round are provided.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 79, the jackpot E (V route closing jackpot) is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of 0 to 49 (see 202b1 in FIG. 79). This jackpot E (V route closed jackpot) is a jackpot to which a special gaming state of 15 rounds is given, and in each round of the jackpot, the first specific winning opening 65a is set for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse, or the ball is hit). It is a big hit that is opened (until 10 balls enter). That is, in the special game state (big hit state), the ball cannot be put into the probability variation entry ball opening 654 arranged inside the second variable winning device 650, so that the time saving state of the normal symbol is 100 after the big hit is completed. Granted times.

On the other hand, the jackpot F (V route open jackpot) is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of 50 to 99 (see 202b2 in FIG. 79). This jackpot F is a jackpot to which a special gaming state of 15 rounds is given, and in the 12 rounds of the jackpot, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 elapse for a predetermined time (30 seconds). Until, or until 10 balls enter, and in the 1st to 11th rounds and 13th to 15th rounds, the first specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse, or 10 balls enter). It is a big hit that is opened (until it hits the ball). In the jackpot F, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened in the 12th round, so if the ball can be entered into the second specific winning opening 650a in the 12th round, the special symbol is in a probable state after the jackpot ends. Is given. On the other hand, in the 12th round, the ball did not hit right, or even though it hit right, the ball entered only the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, and as a result, the ball went to the second specific winning opening 650a. If 12 rounds are completed without entering the ball, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times after the end of the jackpot F.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the modified example of the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 80 to 83, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the modified example of the first embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the content of the main process (see FIG. 34) is changed from the first embodiment. Specifically, the difference is that the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 80) is executed instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) executed in the main process (see FIG. 34) of the first embodiment. ing. Hereinafter, only the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 80) will be described, and detailed description of other processes that have not been changed from the first embodiment will be omitted.

First, the jackpot control process 3 (S1031) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the modified example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 80. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 3 (S1031). The jackpot control process 3 is a process of setting the opening and closing of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a for each round of the jackpot state.

In each of the jackpot control processes 3, S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, S1109, S1110, and S1112, S1101, S1102, and S1104 are executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. , S1105, S1109, S1110, and S1112. Further, in the jackpot control process 3 (S1031), the processes of S1103, S1107, and S1108, which were executed in the jackpot control process (FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, are abolished.

Further, in the jackpot control process 3 (S1031), when it is determined in the process of S1105 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 36). Instead of, the jackpot operation setting process 2 is executed (S1121), and this process is terminated. The details of the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) will be described with reference to FIG. 81.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) described above. The jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) is a process for setting the states (open state or closed state) of the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a.

Of the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121), the processes S1201 to S1203 and S1206 are the same as the processes S1201 to S1203 and S1206 in the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 36) of the first embodiment, respectively. Processing is executed.
Further, in the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) in this modified example, when it is determined that the 12th round is in the process of S1201 (S1201: Yes), then the jackpot type this time is jackpot F (V route open). It is determined whether or not it is a jackpot) (S1211).

If it is determined that the jackpot is not F in the processing of S1211 (S1211: No), it means that the first specific winning opening (first jackpot opening) 65a is the jackpot E that is opened in all rounds of the jackpot. , The opening of the first specific winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a is set (S1202), and the process shifts to S1206.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot F is the jackpot F in the processing of S1211 (S1211: Yes), the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is opened only in the 12th round. The opening of the winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set (S1203). As described above, the closing portion 910 that closed the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is the same member as the ball storage portion 920 that closed the induction flow path 607 of the lottery device 600. (A part of the slide member 900), and the closing portion 910 and the ball storage portion 920 slide and displace in conjunction with each other. Therefore, by setting the opening of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a by the processing of S1203, the induction flow path 607 inside the storage device 600 is also opened (that is, the general winning opening 602 is also opened. ).

After setting the opening of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 by the processing of S1203, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a , And, in order to notify the voice lamp control device 114 that the induction flow path 607 is set to the open state (release state), a storage state command corresponding to the open state (release state) is set (S1212). , The process shifts to S1206. The storage state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the storage status command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display rear image change command to the display control device 114 based on the storage status command. When the display control device 114 receives the display rear image change command, the display area 717 is generated in the third symbol display device 81, and the characters "CHANGE !!" and "Probability change route is being opened !!" are displayed. Is displayed (see FIG. 76). By displaying these characters, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that it is an opportunity to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol.

If the state shifts to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, it becomes easy for the player to win the jackpot again in a short period of time after the jackpot ends, which is a very advantageous state for the player. Therefore, in the 12th round of the jackpot F, the player can be made to launch the ball more seriously aiming at the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the jackpot from becoming a mere task for obtaining a prize ball, and to enjoy the game during the special gaming state (during the jackpot state).

As described above, the ratio of the balls that reach the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a among the right-handed balls is the nails 921a, 921b provided at the entrance portion of the storage device 600 ( It can be changed by adjusting (see FIG. 77). For example, by adjusting the nail 921a to open to the right side of the front view or adjusting the nail 921b to open to the left side of the front view (opening the nail), the right-handed ball flows into the storage device 600 more. It will be easier to do. Therefore, the proportion of balls that reach the second specific winning opening 650a is relatively low. That is, the more the nails 921a and 921b are opened, the more difficult it is for the ball to enter the second specific winning opening 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot F. In addition, if 10 balls enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 without being able to enter the ball into the second specific winning opening 650, the 12 rounds will end. .. Therefore, it becomes difficult to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol. If the balls are more likely to flow into the storage device 600, the balls are more likely to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, which has a larger number of winning balls to be paid out than the second specified winning opening 650a. (See FIG. 9B). As a result, the player can win a large number of prize balls, so that the player's interest in the jackpot can be improved.

Here, in many cases, in the 1st to 11th rounds, the player strikes right at the first specific winning opening 65a, so that the player is placed downstream of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Balls also flow into the installed storage device 600. Therefore, by the time the 12th round starts, one ball is stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920. Therefore, when the 12th round starts and the slide member 900 is displaced by sliding and the upper part of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is opened, the ball stored in the upper part of the ball storage portion 920 is opened as the general winning opening. (High value winning opening) Flow down to 602. As a result, out of the balls that hit right in the 12th round, 9 balls went to the 2nd specific winning opening 650a by the time they entered the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. If the ball cannot be entered, the 12th round will end.

On the other hand, by adjusting the nail 921a and the nail 921b so as to be close to each other (closing the nail), it becomes difficult for the right-handed ball to flow into the storage device 600. Therefore, since the proportion of the ball reaching the second specific winning opening 650 is relatively high, it becomes easy to put the ball into the second specific winning opening 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot F. Therefore, after the jackpot ends, it becomes easy to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol. As a result, it becomes easy to win the jackpot again in a short period of time after the end of the jackpot F, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In this way, by changing the ease with which the ball can enter the storage device 600 when hitting to the right, the second ball entry port 650a provided downstream of the entrance portion of the storage device 600 can be reached. You can change the ease of entering the ball. Therefore, the clerk in the hall can change the playability when the jackpot F is obtained only by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b. That is, it is difficult to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, and it is easy to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, and it is easy to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, 12 It is easy to win many prize balls in the round, but it is possible to switch between playability that makes it difficult to shift to the probable state of special symbols. Therefore, the performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily changed according to the business policy of the hall.

Returning to FIG. 80, the description will be continued. In the process of S1109 of the jackpot control process 3, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), then the winning process (S1111) executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. ), The winning process 2 is executed (S1122), and the process shifts to S1112. The details of the winning process 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 82.

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the winning process 2 (S1122) executed by the MPU 201 in the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 80) in this modified example. In the winning process 2 (S1122), the processes S1401 to S1405 and S1408 to S1420 are the same as the processes S1401 to S1405 and S1408 to S1420 in the winning process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment, respectively. Processing is executed.

Further, in the winning process 3 (S1122) in the present modification, the value of the winning number counter 203j becomes 10 or more in the processing of S1404 (that is, the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a, the second specifying. When it is determined that the total number of balls entered in the winning opening (second large opening) 650a or the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is 10 or more) (S1404: Yes), or the round time When it is determined that (30 seconds from the start of the round) has passed (S1405: Yes), one of the open winning openings (first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a, or second specific The winning opening closing process (S1431) for setting the closure of the winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602) is executed (S1431), and the process shifts to S1408. The winning opening closing process (S1431) will be described with reference to FIG. 83.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the winning opening closing process (S1431). This winning opening closing process (S1431) is a process for setting the closing of the winning opening when the conditions for closing the winning opening are satisfied in each round of the jackpot.

In this winning opening closing process (S1431), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the 12th round (S4401). If it is not the 12th round (S4401: No), it means that the currently open winning opening is the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a, so that the first specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) (1 large opening) 65a is set to be closed (S4402), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4401, if it is determined that the current round is the 12th round (S4401), the winning openings are different depending on the jackpot type, so this jackpot is the jackpot F (V route). It is determined whether or not it is an open jackpot) (S4403). Then, when it is determined that the jackpot is not F (V route open jackpot) (that is, the jackpot E (V route closed jackpot)) (S4403: No), the currently open winning slot is the first specific winning slot (S4403: No). Since it means that it is the first large opening opening) 650a, the closing of the first specific winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a is set by shifting the processing to S4402 (S4402), and this processing is performed. finish.

In the processing of S4403, if it is determined that the jackpot this time is jackpot F (V route open jackpot) (S4403: Yes), the second specific winning opening (second jackpot opening) 650a is opened only in the 12th round. It means that the second specific winning opening (second big opening) 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 are currently open. Therefore, in this case, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 are set to be closed (S4404), and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) is set. In order to notify the voice lamp control device 113 that the mouth) 650a and the general winning mouth (high value winning mouth) 602 are closed, a storage status command corresponding to the closed status (storage status) is set (port). S4405), this process is terminated.

The storage state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the storage status command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display rear image change command to the display control device 114 based on the storage status command. When the display control device 114 receives the display rear image change command, the display area 717 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is erased. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the chance of shifting to the probabilistic state of the special symbol has ended.

By executing this winning opening closing process (S1431), the open winning opening can be accurately closed.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the modified example of the first embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85. In the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, the processing content of the command determination processing is partially changed from the command determination processing (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment. More specifically, in order to execute the process for receiving the storage state command output from the main control device 110 in the jackpot, each of S1921 to S1923 in the command determination process (see FIG. 69) of the second embodiment. Execute the process. Since the processing content itself is the same as the command determination processing (see FIG. 69) in the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, in the command determination process in this modification, the error notification process 2 (S1971) is executed instead of the error notification process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment. This error notification process 2 (S1971) will be described with reference to FIG. 84.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the error notification process 2 (S1971) described above. In each of the error notification processes 2 (S1971), S1931 to S1934, S1936, and S1937, the same processes as the error notification process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment are executed. Further, in the error notification process 2 (S1971) in the present modification, when it is determined that the value of the permissible time counter 223i is 0 in the process of S1934 (S1981), the hit notification process in the first embodiment (FIG. 45). (See), the hit notification process 2 is executed (S1981), and this process is terminated. Similar to the hit notification process (see FIG. 45) in the first embodiment, the hit notification process 2 (S1981) is a process for notifying when a problem occurs in the storage valve 607a during the big hit. Is.

Next, the above-mentioned hit notification process 2 (S1981) will be described with reference to FIG. 85. In the hit notification process 2 (S1981), first, it is determined whether or not the storage state flag 223k is on (S1991). In the process of S1991, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is on (S1991: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the flow time counter 223l is 0 (S1992), and the counter value is 0. If not (S1992), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1992, when it is determined that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is 0 (S1992: Yes), the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state (storage state), and the ball draining period has elapsed. Next, it is determined whether or not the winning information command includes the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 (S1993).

Then, when it is determined that the entry information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is not included (S1993: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the entry information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is included (S1993: Yes), the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state (storage state). It means that the ball is flowing down to the downstream of the storage valve 607a in spite of the fact that the ball is flowing down. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the storage valve 607a is not normally closed. Therefore, a display error command corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 607a is set (S1994), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1991, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not on (off) (S1991: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is 0 (S1995). ). Then, when it is determined that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is not 0 (S1995: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is on in the processing of S1995 (S1995: Yes), then the received winning information command is entered into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the ball is included (S1996). Then, if the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is not included (S1996: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In the processing of S1996, if the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included (S1996: Yes), the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (release state). This means that the ball has entered the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 even though the ball ejection period has passed. That is, since there is a high possibility that the storage valve 607a is not normally opened, the process shifts to S1994 in order to notify the malfunction of the storage valve 607a.

By this hit notification process 2 (S1981), when a problem occurs in the operation of the storage valve 607a, the problem can be promptly notified, so that the problem can be quickly resolved.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the first embodiment, the slide member 900 is used to open and close the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the induction flow path in the storage device 600. It is configured so that the opening / closing operation of 607 can be performed at the same time. That is, the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is configured as one of the winning openings for obtaining a prize ball during a big hit.

Since the switching of the state of the second specific winning opening 650a and the switching of the state of the guide flow path 607 can be realized only by sliding the slide member 900, the second specification can be realized as in the first embodiment. The processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where the winning opening 650 and the storage valve 607a are controlled separately. That is, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced. In particular, since the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes important processing in the game such as drawing a special symbol and determining the fluctuation time, if the processing speed decreases due to an increase in the processing load, The influence on the game will be large. On the other hand, in this modification, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced by introducing the slide member 900, so that the main processing in the game can be executed more reliably.

Further, in this modification, only the probability-changing ball opening 654 is provided inside the second variable winning device 650, and the ball that has flowed into the inside of the second variable winning device 650 always enters the probability-changing ball opening 654. It is configured to be a sphere. As a result, if the ball can be inserted into the second specific winning opening 650a, it is possible to realize a simple playability of shifting to a probabilistic state of a special symbol after the end of the big hit. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to understand whether or not to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, so that it is possible to provide playability that even beginners can enjoy. Further, since the flow path switching valve 650d, the induction flow path 653, and the normal ball entry port 655 provided inside the second variable winning device 650 in the first embodiment are abolished, the second variable winning device 650 The structure of can be simplified. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

Further, in this modification, the ratio of the balls flowing into the storage device 600 among the right-handed balls is adjusted by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b (see FIG. 77) provided at the inlet portion of the storage device 600. It is configured to be variable.

Here, for gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is drawn based on whether or not a game ball wins at the starting winning opening, and whether or not to shift to a probability fluctuation state is separately determined. There is something to draw. As a result, it is suppressed that the hit is merely a task for obtaining a large number of balls, and the hit game is performed with the expectation of shifting to the probability fluctuation state, and the player's interest in the game is improved. I am trying to.

Some of the above-mentioned gaming machines are provided with a predetermined area in which the gaming ball can enter only during the hit, and the probability fluctuates after the hit by allowing the gaming ball to enter the predetermined area. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-180999).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the ratio of the game ball entering the predetermined area during hitting is preset for each model, so in order to make the ratio of shifting to the probability fluctuation state different, the hole is used. There was no choice but to introduce a model with a different side. In other words, with conventional gaming machines, there is no degree of freedom in the rate of transition to the probability fluctuation state, and it has been difficult to flexibly respond to different business policies for each hall. Therefore, there has been a demand for a more versatile gaming machine.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, the ease of entering the ball into the storage device 600 when hitting right can be easily changed by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b. It is configured in. As a result, it is possible to change the ease of entering the ball into the second entry port 650a provided downstream of the inlet portion of the storage device 600. Therefore, the clerk in the hall can change the playability when the jackpot F is obtained only by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b. That is, it is difficult to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, and it is easy to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, and it is easy to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, which is special. It is possible to switch between playability and playability, which makes it difficult to shift to a probabilistic state of the symbol. Therefore, the performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily changed according to the business policy of the hall, so that the versatility can be improved.

In this modification, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is configured to be opened for a maximum of 5 seconds in the 12 rounds of the jackpot F, but the opening time may be arbitrarily determined. For example, by setting the opening time to 10 seconds, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, it becomes easy to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Further, the opening time may be set to, for example, 2 seconds. By shortening the opening time, various striking methods are performed in order to allow the ball to enter the second specific winning opening 650a in a limited time, and the pachinko machine 10 with the nails 921a and 921b more closed. Can be selected. Therefore, it is possible to be absorbed in the game by the pachinko machine 10.

In this modified example, the entrance of the storage device 600 is provided upstream of the second specific winning opening 650a, and the ease of entering the storage device 600 can be changed by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b. However, the configuration for varying the proportion of balls reaching the second specific winning opening 650a is not limited to this. For example, instead of the storage device 600, an out opening or a winning opening in which the winning ball is paid out when the ball enters may be provided. Then, the second specific winning opening 650a may be configured so that the open / closed state can be switched by a single member. Even with this configuration, the proportion of balls reaching the second specific winning opening 650a can be changed by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b to change the ease of entering the ball into the out opening or the winning opening. Can be made to. Further, by replacing the storage device 600 with an out port or a winning port, the structure can be simplified, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Further, the ease of inflow into the storage device 600 does not necessarily have to be adjustable. That is, instead of the nails 921a and 921b, a columnar member fixed to the board surface may be provided. As a result, it is possible to make it impossible for the hole side to adjust whether or not the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot F, so that the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. Even if you don't ball, you can prevent the point of disappointment from heading to the hole. That is, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling distrust of the hall.

In this modification, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 are configured to be opened in the 12th round of the jackpot F, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be opened in the first round. As a result, it is possible to determine at an early stage whether or not to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, so that the game can be played with peace of mind in the subsequent special game state (big hit state). Further, the second specific winning opening 650a may be configured to be opened in the 15th round. As a result, whether or not to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol is not determined until the final round, the 15th round, so that the player's expectation for the probabilistic state of the special symbol can be maintained for a longer period of time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game during the jackpot game. Further, for example, when the jackpot F is obtained, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 may be continuously opened in a plurality of rounds. Specifically, for example, it may be configured to be opened in the 12th round and the 13th round. As a result, the balls stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920 by the end of the 11th round enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the 12th round, and the ball storage unit in the 13th round. The state where the sphere does not exist on the upper part of the 920 can be set. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of the ball entering the second specific winning opening 650a.

In this modification, as in the first embodiment, only one sphere can be stored inside the storage device 600, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of spheres can be stored. For example, it may be configured so that four balls can be stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920. In this case, the end condition of the 12 rounds is changed, and the 12 rounds are ended when, for example, a total of 5 balls enter the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, and the general winning opening 602. It may be configured to do so. In the 1st to 11th rounds of the jackpot, the ball is played in an attempt to enter the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a by hitting the right side. The maximum number (4) is stored. That is, when the 12th round is started and the ball storage unit 920 is opened, the four stored balls flow into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 all at once, so that immediately after the start of the 12th round. In this state, four balls have entered the specific winning openings (first specific winning opening 65a, second specific winning opening 650a, and general winning opening 602). Therefore, 12 rounds are completed when one more ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a or the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 (a total of five balls are the second specific winning opening). Since the situation is such that the ball enters the 650a or the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602), the opportunity to enter the second specific winning opening 650a can be limited to one ball. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel more nervous and play the game for 12 rounds. Also, in the 1st to 11th rounds of the jackpot, while hoping that the balls do not flow into the storage device 600 as much as possible (that is, the number of balls stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920 does not reach the upper limit of 4, but 12 You can have a big hit game (hopefully for the round). Therefore, it is possible to play the game while feeling tense even during the jackpot, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the jackpot from becoming merely a task for obtaining a prize ball, and the player's jackpot game. It is possible to improve the interest in.

The number of balls that can be stored in the specific winning opening, which is the end condition of the 12 rounds, and the maximum number of balls that can be stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920 may be arbitrarily determined. For example, the end condition of 12 rounds may be set to be equal to or less than the number of balls that can be stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920. As a result, the game can be played with a stronger hope that the ball will not be stored inside the storage device 600 by the start of the 12th round. On the contrary, the upper limit of the number of balls that can be stored in the ball storage unit 920 may be reduced. As a result, even if the maximum number of balls is stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920 by the start of the 12th round, the opportunity to enter the balls into the second specific winning opening 650a is given multiple times in the 12th round. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In this modification, in the 12th round of the jackpot F, the effect image shown in FIG. 76 is displayed when the ball storage unit 920 is opened, but the effect during the jackpot is limited to this. is not it. For example, it may be configured to notify whether the jackpot is E or F depending on the result of the effect executed by the 11th round of the jackpot. More specifically, for example, in each of the 1st to 11th rounds, a production in which a ally of justice and a monster fight may be performed. Then, if the ally of justice wins by the 11th round, it is notified that it is a jackpot F, and if the ally of justice is defeated, it may be notified that it is a jackpot E. That is, if the ally of justice wins, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened in the 12th round, so that the player can recognize that it is a chance to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol. This makes it possible for the player to observe the result of the effect performed at the jackpot more interestingly.

In addition, there are variations in the production content, and there is a high possibility that the justice ally will be defeated (in the case of jackpot E), and the production content is highly expected to be won by the justice ally (easily selected in the case of jackpot F). (Easy to be selected in) may be provided. For example, if the ally of justice attacks the enemy with a special move, or if the ally of justice avoids the attack of the enemy, the expectation of winning is high, and the attack of the ally of justice is missed. It may be configured to increase the possibility of defeat if the enemy attacks with a special move. As a result, not only the result of whether or not the ally of justice wins, but also the result can be predicted by the flow of the production leading to victory or defeat. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the jackpot game.

The content of the production performed by the 11th round is not limited to the above-mentioned production in which the ally of justice and the monster fight, and it can be suggested that the jackpot F is advantageous and the jackpot E is more disadvantageous than the jackpot F. Any aspect may be used. For example, if the boy character 710 searches for the treasure and the treasure can be found by the 11th round, it may be configured to be notified that it is a jackpot F, or the boy character 710 may be configured to search for the treasure. It may be configured to display the effect of eating big and to notify that it is a big hit F when all the provided food is eaten.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is provided with a storage device 600 having a unique configuration that is not mounted on a general game machine, an effect for explaining the playability related to the storage device 600 is provided. You may. More specifically, for example, the condition that the image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear image and the storage valve 607a is opened, the merit when the storage valve 607a is opened, and the demerit when the ball is hit right in the closed state. It may be configured to display an image (explanatory image) for explaining. Thereby, the player can easily understand the playability. Further, the back type on which the explanatory image is displayed may be configured so that the back type can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. As a result, the player who is accustomed to playing the pachinko machine 10 and fully understands the game playability can change to the back type in which the explanatory image is not displayed.

In this modified example, both the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 are treated as winning openings for obtaining a jackpot prize ball, but the general winning opening (high value winning opening) is treated. The winning opening) 602 may be treated as a normal winning opening. That is, as a condition for ending each round of the jackpot, each round of the jackpot ends when 10 or more balls enter the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a (generally at the end of the round). The number of balls entered into the winning opening 602 does not matter). As a result, the more the ball enters the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the 12 rounds of the jackpot, the more profitable the player is, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In this modification, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so that the ball can easily flow into the storage device 600, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second specific winning opening 650a, and the ball is made into the storage device 600. By adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so that the ball does not easily flow in, the ball can easily enter the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b, the rate of transition to the probable state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot can be changed, but the rate of transition to the probable state of the special symbol is changed. The method is not limited to this. For example, instead of keeping the ratio of balls flowing into the storage device 600 constant, a probability variation ball opening 654 and a normal ball entry 655 are provided inside the second variable winning device 650 as in the first embodiment. It may be configured. Then, the hall clerk may be able to adjust the ratio of the balls flowing into the inside of the second variable winning device 650 to be distributed to the probability variation ball opening 654 and the normal ball opening 655. More specifically, for example, the second variable winning device 650 in this modification is replaced with the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 15) in the first embodiment, and then switched to the flow path switching valve 650d. Abolish the shaft 650e. Then, for example, a nail may be struck at the branch position between the guide flow path 652 and the guide flow path 653 (that is, above the portion where the switching shaft 650e is provided in the first embodiment). Further, the position for striking the nail may be, for example, upward by a distance of about the radius of the sphere from the position where the switching shaft 650e is provided in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15). That is, it may be a position where the ball flowing down the guide flow path 651 can come into contact (collision), and a position where the ball can flow down with respect to the guide flow path 652 and the guide flow path 653. With this configuration, if the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 is adjusted to the right, the game ball flowing down the guide flow path 651 easily comes into contact (collision) with the left side surface of the nail. Therefore, the ball is likely to be repelled to the left in the front view. Therefore, the ball easily flows into the guidance flow path 652 provided on the left side of the front view downstream of the second variable winning device 650, so that the ball easily enters the probability variation entry ball opening 654. Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 to the right, it is possible to easily change the special symbol after the big hit. On the contrary, if the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 is adjusted to the left side, the game ball flowing down the guide flow path 651 easily comes into contact (collision) with the right side surface of the nail, so that the ball is in front of the nail. It becomes easy to be repelled to the right. Therefore, the ball easily flows into the guidance flow path 653 provided on the left side of the front view downstream of the second variable winning device 650, so that the ball easily enters the probability variation entry ball opening 654. Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 to the right side, it is possible to make it difficult for the special symbol to be in a probable state after the end of the big hit. In this way, the specifications of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed according to the business policy of the hall by setting the configuration so that the ease of entering the ball into the probabilistic entry port 654 can be adjusted. Therefore, it is possible to provide playability corresponding to the business policy of each hall.

Further, as another specific example in which the rate of transition to the probabilistic state of the special symbol can be changed after the end of the jackpot, the inlet portion of the storage device 600 is opened instead of the nails 921a and 921b in this modified example. A variable member may be provided to switch between the closed state and the closed state. Then, the variable member may be configured to repeat the open state and the closed state while the power is turned on. In this case, after fixing the length of one cycle composed of the open state and the closed state (for example, 3 seconds), the period set to the open state and the period set to the closed state The ratio may be configured so that the hall can be adjusted. More specifically, for example, an operating means that can be set to a plurality of states such as a DIP switch is provided. Then, for example, if the state of the switch indicates (0000000000B), the inlet of the storage device 600 is configured not to be set to the closed state. That is, since the entrance is always open, the game ball is set in a state where it is most likely to flow into the storage device 600. Then, if the state of the switch indicates (11111111B), the inlet of the storage device 600 is configured to be always set to the closed state. That is, the ball that flows into the storage device 600 at the jackpot disappears, and the state is set so that it is most likely to flow into the second specific winning opening 650a. Then, when the DIP switch is in another state (00000001B to 11111110B), the period in which the DIP switch is closed may become longer as it goes from (00000000000B) to (11111111B). That is, the ball may easily enter the second specific winning opening 650a toward (11111111B), and the probability variation state of the special symbol may be easily set after the jackpot ends. With this configuration, in the hall where the pachinko machine 10 is to be used as a game machine that is less likely to be in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, for example, the variable member is closed for 0.5 seconds and the variable member is for 2.5 seconds. The setting of the DIP switch may be adjusted so as to repeat the open state. On the contrary, in a hole where the pachinko machine 10 is to be used as a game machine having a game property that is likely to be in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, for example, the variable member repeats a closed state for 2.5 seconds and an open state for 0.5 seconds. Just adjust the DIP switch settings. As a result, the specifications of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed according to the business policy of the hall, so that it is possible to provide highly versatile playability corresponding to the business policy of each hall.

<Modified example of the second embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 94. The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is configured such that the induction flow path 704 provided inside the storage device 700 can be closed by the storage valve 704a so that one ball can be stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a in the closed state. It was composed of. Then, in the state where the balls are stored, the balls can be easily entered into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 or the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e, which have many prize balls to be paid out. In the state where the storage valve 704a is opened, the balls are easily inserted into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 in which the number of winning balls to be paid out is small. The storage valve 704a is basically set to the closed state, and is configured to be opened when the player operates the release button 800. That is, if the storage valve 704a is closed, there is a possibility that a ball may enter any of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d and 703e (prize). There is a possibility that a lot of balls can be obtained, but there is a possibility that a prize ball cannot be obtained (a state of high gambling), and if the storage valve 704a is in an open state, the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 is a general prize. It is in a state where the ball can be entered into the mouth (medium value prize opening) 701 (a state in which a small amount of the prize ball can be stably obtained). Therefore, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched by the player depending on whether or not the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) is operated, so that each player selects the playability that suits his or her own taste. It was configured so that the game could be played.

On the other hand, in this modified example, a maximum of two balls can be stored inside the storage device 700. Further, when the storage valve 704a is closed, depending on the arrangement of the stored balls, the ball can easily enter the ball entry port (it becomes easier to enter the general winning opening 702 or the ball enters the out port). Is it easier to ball?) Is configured to change. That is, by confirming the arrangement of the stored balls in the state where the storage valve 704a is closed, it is easy to recognize whether or not it is easy to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702. It is configured to be able to.

The only difference in configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the second embodiment from the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is that the internal structure of the storage device 700 is different. The second execution is for other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the form. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 86, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example will be described. FIG. 86 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example. As shown in FIG. 86, also in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, the storage device 700 is provided downstream of the path provided on the right side of the game board 13. As described above, in this modification, a maximum of two balls can be stored inside the storage device 700. Details of the storage device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88.

FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an example of a case where the storage valve 704a of the storage device 700 is closed and two balls are stored. As shown in FIG. 87, in this modification, the storage valve 704a is inclined downward in the lower right direction in the front view. Therefore, most of the spheres that first flow into the induction flow path 704 with the storage valve 704a closed are stationary in a state of being biased to the right side of the induction flow path 704 due to the inclination of the storage valve 704a. Further, as shown in FIG. 87, in the induction flow path 704, the upper portion of the storage valve 704a is longer than that of the second embodiment. Further, the induction flow path 704 does not have a width sufficient for two balls to be lined up side by side. Therefore, when one sphere is stored to the right inside the guidance flow path 704 and another sphere flows into the guidance flow path 704, in many cases, it is newly stored on the upper left side of the previously stored sphere. (A new ball is stored between the previously stored ball and the inner wall portion on the left side of the induction flow path 704).

In the storage state shown in FIG. 87 (the first stored ball is stored to the right and the second stored ball is stored to the left), the balls that have subsequently flowed into the storage device 700 are stored. It becomes easy to collide with the right side surface of the second stored ball. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed into the storage device 700 changes its traveling direction to the right due to the impact of collision (contact) with the stored sphere. That is, the ball flows into the induction flow path 708 and enters either the out port (small value winning port) 703d or 703e.

In this way, in the storage state shown in FIG. 87, even if the ball can flow into the storage device 700, the ball enters the out port (small value winning port) 703d, 703e. The player cannot get the prize ball because the ball is thrown. That is, the storage state shown in FIG. 87 is disadvantageous to the player.

In the induction flow path 704, on the upper left side of the storage valve 704a, a ball entry sensor 704b for detecting the ball when the ball is present on the front side of the front view is provided. With this ball entry sensor 704b, the arrangement of balls can be determined. More specifically, when the ball entry sensor 704b continuously detects the ball for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), it is determined that the arrangement is as shown in FIG. 87. An image (see FIG. 89) that prompts the player to press the release button 800 when a certain period of time has elapsed since the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 by determining whether or not the arrangement is shown in FIG. 87. ) Can be displayed. As a result, the disadvantageous arrangement (see FIG. 87) in which the ball flowing into the storage device 700 easily enters the out ports (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e continues for a long time, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to suppress the storage.

Next, another example in the case where two balls are stored will be described with reference to FIG. 88. In the example shown in FIG. 88, the game ball that first flows into the induction flow path 704 with the storage valve 704a closed is stored to the left with respect to the induction flow path 704, and is stored in the second induction flow path. The sphere that has flowed into the 704 is stored to the right of the induction flow path 704. When the storage state shown in FIG. 88 is reached, the spheres that have subsequently flowed into the storage device 700 are likely to collide (contact) with the left side surface of the second stored sphere. Therefore, the flow direction of the ball that collides (contacts) with the stored ball tends to change to the left, so that the number of prize balls that flow down the induction flow path 706 and are paid out is large (6 payouts) in general. It becomes easier to enter the winning opening (high value winning opening) 702.

In this way, in the storage state shown in FIG. 88, by flowing the ball into the storage device 700, the ball can easily enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702. , It is an advantageous state for the player who can expect to win the prize ball every time the ball flows in.

Since the storage valve 704a is inclined downward to the lower right, the storage state shown in FIG. 88 is more difficult to realize than the storage state shown in FIG. 87. For example, when two balls flow into the induction flow path 704 almost at the same time after the storage valve 704a is closed, or when the ball that first reaches the storage valve 704a is the storage valve 704a or the induction flow path 704. This can be realized when a second ball flows into the induction flow path 704 while colliding with the inner wall portion and repelling in the upper left direction.

Most of the cases where the storage valve 704a is closed are in the storage state shown in FIG. 87, but in this modified example as well, the storage valve 704a can be opened by operating the release button 800 as in the second embodiment. .. That is, the spheres can be stored in the storage device 700 in the expectation that the storage state will be reset and the storage state will be restored as shown in FIG. 88. Therefore, since the player can be made to play the game with the goal of achieving the storage state shown in FIG. 88, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. Further, when the storage state shown in FIG. 88 is realized, a sense of accomplishment can be given to the player, and the prize is awarded by continuing to put the ball into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701. You can have a feeling of expectation that you can get a lot of balls.

Further, in the arrangement shown in FIG. 88, the arrangement is deviated from the ball entry sensor 704b (the ball does not shield the front side of the ball entry sensor 704b), so even if the arrangement shown in FIG. 88 continues for a long time. , It is possible to prevent (suppress) the display of an image (see FIG. 89) prompting the player to press the release button 800. Therefore, the advantageous state in which it is easy to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 can be continued for a longer period of time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 89, an image (suggestion display image) for prompting the pressing of the release button 800 will be described. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an image (suggestion display image) for prompting the pressing of the release button 800. This suggestion display image is an image shown in FIG. 87, which is displayed when it is determined that the arrangement disadvantageous to the player is continuous for a certain period of time (1 minute). More specifically, when the ball entry sensor 704b continuously detects the ball for 1 minute, it is determined that the ball is stable in the arrangement shown in FIG. 87, and the suggestion display image is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 89, when the display of the suggestion display image is set, the characters “Unfavorable placement” are displayed for the small area Ds2. By displaying this character, the arrangement shown in FIG. 89 for the player is disadvantageous to the player (the arrangement in which the ball flowing into the storage device 700 is guided to the out ports 703d and 703e). You can make them recognize that. In addition, below the characters "Unfavorable placement", the characters "Press the button to reset the placement !!" are displayed. By displaying this character, it is possible to make the player recognize that the disadvantageous state is eliminated by pressing (operating) the release button 800.

As described above, in this modified example, the disadvantageous arrangement is notified to the player by the suggestion display image, the disadvantageous arrangement is promoted by pressing (operating) the release button 800, and the advantageous arrangement (FIG. 88). It is possible to play the game aiming at the arrangement (arrangement in which the ball is guided to the general winning opening 702). Therefore, the player can be made to participate more actively in the game.

In the present embodiment, the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed when a long time (1 minute) elapses while the player is in a disadvantageous state (see FIG. 87). Alternatively, the storage valve 704a may be configured to be switched to the open state (released state). That is, when the ball entry sensor 704b continuously detects the ball for a certain period of time (for example, 1 minute), it is determined that the ball is stable in a disadvantageous state, and the arrangement of the ball stored in the storage device 700 is reset. It may be configured to open the storage valve 704a in order to do so. As a result, even a beginner who does not fully understand the mechanism of the storage device 700 can prevent the game from being played for a long time without noticing the disadvantageous state.

In this modified example, the storage valve 704a is configured to be opened when the ball is continuously detected for 1 minute by the ball entry sensor 704b, but the arrangement of FIG. 87 is reset (the storage valve 704a is opened). ) Is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily set. By shortening the time (for example, 30 seconds), it is possible to shorten the period in which the player is in a disadvantageous state. Further, by increasing the time (for example, 5 minutes), the frequency of displaying the suggestion display image can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

<About the electrical configuration in the modified example of the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example will be described. The electrical configuration in the modified example of the second embodiment is that the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed from the electrical configuration in the second embodiment, and that the voice lamp control device 113 The difference is that the ball entry sensor 228 is electrically connected to the input / output port 225. Since the other electrical configurations are the same as those in the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the second embodiment, at least a disadvantage time counter 223m and a suggestion display flag 223n are added to the RAM 223 in the modified example of the second embodiment.

The disadvantageous time counter 223m is a counter used for determining the elapsed time after the player is placed in a disadvantageous arrangement (a state in which the ball is guided to the out ports 703d and 703e) shown in FIG. 87. The value of the disadvantage time counter 223m is incremented by 1 each time a ball is detected by the ball entry sensor 228 (S4503 in FIG. 92). Further, in the state where the counter value is added (the state of the value larger than 0), if the ball is not detected by the ball entry sensor 228, it is reset to 0 (S4508 in FIG. 92). In this modified example, when it is determined based on the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m that the arrangement is disadvantageous to the player shown in FIG. 87 (the state in which the ball is guided to the out ports 703d and 703e). The above-mentioned suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is controlled to be displayed.

The suggestion display flag 223n is a flag indicating whether or not the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed. When the suggestion display flag 223n is on, it indicates that the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed, and when it is off, it indicates that the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is not displayed. Shown. The suggestion display flag 223n is set to on when the display of the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is set (see S4506 in FIG. 92). On the other hand, the storage valve 704a is set to off when a storage state command indicating that the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (release state) is received (see S4607 in FIG. 94).

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the modified example of the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the modified example of the second embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 91, the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described.

In each of the main processes (see FIG. 92) in this modification, the same processes as those in S1801 to S1817 in the second embodiment are executed. Further, in the main process (see FIG. 92) in the present modification, when the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S1810) is completed, the release suggestion display process for displaying the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is executed (see FIG. 89). S1821), the process shifts to S1811. The details of this release suggestion display process (S1821) will be described with reference to FIG. 93.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the release suggestion display process (S1821). In this release suggestion display process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball entry sensor 228 is on (S4501), if it is determined that it is on (S4501: Yes), then the suggestion display flag 223n is on. It is determined whether or not there is (S4502). If the suggestion display flag 223n is on (S4502: Yes), the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is already being displayed, and it is not necessary to determine whether or not to display the suggestion display image. This process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4502, when it is determined that the suggestion display flag 223n is off (S4502: No), it is updated by adding 1 to the value of the disadvantage time counter 223m (S4503), and the disadvantage time after the update. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter 223m is larger than 60,000 (S4504). Here, since the disadvantageous time counter 223m is updated by 1 (every 1 ms) each time the main process (see FIG. 91) is performed, the counter value 60000 corresponds to 1 minute.

If it is determined in the process of S4503 that the value of the disadvantage time counter 223 m is 60,000 or less (S4504: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is larger than 60,000 (S4504: Yes), a suggestion for notifying the player that a long time (1 minute) has passed since the disadvantageous arrangement was made. A display rear image change command for displaying the display is set (S4505), the suggestion display flag 223n is set to ON (S4506), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4501, when the ball entry sensor 228 determines that the ball is not detected (the ball entry sensor is off) (S4501: No), the arrangement is not disadvantageous (see FIG. 87). In order to mean that, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the disadvantage time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S4507). If it is determined that the value of the disadvantage time counter 223m is larger than 0 as a result of the determination by the processing of S4507 (S4507: Yes), the counter value is initialized to 0 (S4508), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the disadvantage time counter 223m is 0 (S4507: No), the disadvantage time counter 223m has been initialized and does not need to be initialized again, so the processing of S4508 is skipped. This process ends.

By executing this release suggestion display process (S1821), the player plays for a long time while the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 remains disadvantageous to the player (see FIG. 87). Can be prevented.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device in the modified example of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this command determination process. In each of the command determination processes S1901 to S1919 and S1921, the same processes as those of S1901 to S1919 and S1921 of the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the second embodiment are executed, respectively. .. Further, in the command determination process in this modification, when it is determined in the process of S1921 that the storage state command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1921: Yes), an image corresponding to the received storage state command is displayed. (S1929), the storage state command process of (S1929) is executed, and this process is terminated.

The details of this storage state command processing (S1929) will be described with reference to FIG. 94. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing this storage state command processing (S1929). In the storage state command processing (S1929), first, it is determined whether or not the storage state command has notified that the storage valve 704a has been switched to the closed state (storage state) (S4601). Then, when it is determined that the switch to the closed state (storage state) has been notified (S4601: Yes), then the image corresponding to the closed state (see FIG. 63 (a)) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, a display rear image change command for displaying is set (S4602), and by setting the storage state flag 223k to ON, it is shown that the storage valve 704a is in the closed state (S4603), and the process is sent to S4604. And migrate.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4601, when it is determined that the notification by the storage state command is not the closed state (storage state) (notification of switching to the open state (release state)) (S4601: No). Next, a display rear image change command for displaying an image (see FIG. 63 (b)) corresponding to the open state (release state) on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S4605), and a storage valve is set. The storage state flag 223k is set to off to indicate that the current state of the 704a is the open state (release state) (S4606). Then, in order to show that the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is not displayed, the suggestion display flag 223n is set to off (S4607), and the process shifts to S4604.

In the processing of S4604 executed after the processing of S4603 or S4607, in order to determine whether or not it is the ball-draining period from when the storage valve 704a is switched to when the ball is released, the flow-down time counter 223l is used. A counter value corresponding to 1 second is set (S4604), and this process ends. By executing this storage state command processing (S1931), the display content of the third symbol display device 81 can be appropriately updated in association with the state of the storage valve 704a notified from the main control device 110.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the second embodiment is configured so that two balls can be stored inside the storage device 700. Further, as the storage state when the sphere is stored inside, at least the storage state shown in FIG. 87 and the storage state shown in FIG. 88 can be taken. These storage states have different entry ports where balls that have flowed into the storage device 700 can easily enter. Further, since the inside of the storage device 700 is configured to be visible to the player, the storage state can be easily visually determined. Therefore, the player can be made to select whether or not it is better to reset the storage state by temporarily setting the storage valve 704a to the open state.

Further, an advantageous storage state (a storage state in which the ball easily enters the general winning opening 701 shown in FIG. 88) and an unfavorable storage state (a storage state in which the ball easily enters the out port shown in FIG. 87). By providing and, the game can be performed with the expectation that an advantageous storage state (see FIG. 88) will be obtained. Then, even if the storage state becomes unfavorable (see FIG. 87), the storage state is reset by opening the storage valve 704a, and the game aims at the advantageous storage state again (see FIG. 88). Can be done. In addition, the advantageous storage state can give the player a sense of accomplishment, and a large number of prize balls can be obtained by continuing to put the balls into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702. You can have a sense of expectation for what you can do.

The pachinko machine 10 of this modified example is configured so that two balls can be stored inside the storage device 700, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an internal structure capable of storing three or more balls may be used. .. In this case, if the ball entry sensor 228 is provided on the left side near the upper end of the guidance flow path 704, it can be easily determined whether or not the ball entry sensor 228 is in a disadvantageous arrangement to be guided to the out port.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, by providing the ball entry sensor 228 near the upper end of the induction flow path 704 to the left, is the arrangement of the balls stored inside the storage device 700 disadvantageous to the player? Although it was configured so that it could be determined whether or not it was, the mounting position of the ball entry sensor 228 is not limited to this. For example, it may be arranged to the right near the upper end of the induction flow path 704. That is, when the balls stored in the storage device 700 are arranged as shown in FIG. 87, the stored balls are not detected by the ball entry sensor 228, but when the arrangement is shown in FIG. 88, the stored balls are not detected. The ball entry sensor 228 may be arranged so that the upper ball of the stored balls is detected by the ball entry sensor 228. Thereby, it is possible to determine whether or not the ball is arranged so as to easily enter the general winning opening 702 (see FIG. 88). Therefore, based on the detection result of the ball entry sensor 228, for example, when the ball is continuously detected by the ball entry sensor 228 for 5 seconds or more, it can be determined that the ball is stationary in the arrangement shown in FIG. 88. .. Therefore, it is notified that the ball is in an advantageous arrangement for the player as shown in FIG. 88 and that the stored ball is in an advantageous arrangement. Can be done. As a method of notification, for example, the characters "advantageously arranged" and the characters "right-handed big chance!" Are displayed on the small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81. You may. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the current state is advantageous, so that the release button 800 is erroneously pressed (operated) to cause the ball stored in the storage device 700 to flow down. It is possible to suppress the occurrence (reset the advantageous arrangement).

Further, the number of ball entry sensors 228 is not limited to one, and a plurality of ball entry sensors 228 may be provided. More specifically, for example, the ball entry sensors 228 may be provided near the upper end of the induction flow path 704 to the right and to the left, respectively. As a result, when the sensor provided on the left side continues to detect the sphere for, for example, 5 seconds, it can be determined that the sensor is stable in the arrangement shown in FIG. 87. Further, when the sensor provided on the right side continuously detects the sphere for, for example, 5 seconds, it can be determined that the sensor is stable in the arrangement shown in FIG. 88. Therefore, in the case of the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 (arrangement disadvantageous to the player in which the ball is guided to the out ports 703d and 703e), the game is played by displaying the above-mentioned suggestion display image (see FIG. 89). It is possible to urge a person to reset the disadvantageous arrangement. Further, in the case of the arrangement shown in FIG. 88 (arrangement advantageous to the player in which the ball is guided to the general winning opening 702), an image notifying the player that the arrangement is advantageous to the player (for example, "advantageous"). By displaying the characters "arranging" and the characters "right-handed big chance!" Displayed in the small area Ds2), it is recognized that the current state is advantageous, and the game is played. You can improve your motivation.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, the storage valve 704a is configured to be tilted downward in the lower right direction, but the tilt may be reversed. As a result, it becomes easy to realize a storage state (see FIG. 88) that is advantageous for the player, so that the player can more actively aim at the storage device 700 and launch the ball. Further, the inclination formed by the storage valve 704a may be eliminated. As a result, it is possible to completely randomize whether the storage state is favorable or unfavorable.

In the pachinko machine 10 in this modification, the only trigger for opening the storage valve 704a is the pressing (operation) of the release button 800, but other triggers may be provided. For example, the storage valve 704a may be configured to be set to the open state during the jackpot, or the storage state may be reset periodically. If the opportunity to reset the storage state is completely entrusted to the player, once the storage state becomes advantageous (see FIG. 88), the game is continued while maintaining the storage state, and the hall is unsuitable. It may be profitable. On the other hand, if the storage state is configured to be reset periodically, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the favorable storage state from continuing for a long time, and thus it is possible to prevent a disadvantage to the hall.

In this modification, the state of the storage valve 704a is switched based on the pressing (operation) of the release button 800, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of installation days, and the like. As a result, each player can start the game during the period when the storage valve 704a is in a state suitable for his / her taste.

Further, the state of the storage valve 704a may be configured to be switched based on the result of a lottery performed periodically or irregularly. For example, the storage valve 704a is configured to be basically in the closed state (storage state), and a lottery is configured to execute a lottery as to whether or not to switch to the open state (release state) once a minute. You may. Further, when the lottery is won, the storage valve 704a may be opened for 10 seconds, for example. As a result, if the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 is an unfavorable arrangement in which the balls are easily guided to the out openings (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e (see FIG. 87), the lottery is won. As a result, the game can be performed in the hope that the storage valve 704a is opened. On the other hand, when the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 is an advantageous arrangement (see FIG. 88) in which the balls are easily guided to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, the storage valve 704a is opened. You can let them play the game in the hope that they will continue to be out of the lottery so that they will not be lost. Therefore, different lottery results can be expected depending on the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700, so that a novel game property can be provided. Further, the lottery probability of whether or not the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (release state) may be adjusted so that the clerk of the hall or the like can adjust it. As a result, when the player selects one machine to play the game from among the plurality of pachinko machines 10, it is possible to predict the machine having a good lottery probability and select the machine. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of the habit of setting the lottery probability of the hall, it is possible to improve the interest of the player at the stage of selecting the machine before starting the game. ..

In this modification, since the storage device 700 having a peculiar configuration that is not mounted on a general gaming machine is provided, an effect for explaining the playability related to the storage device 700 may be provided. More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear image, and an image (explanatory image) explaining the conditions for opening the storage valve 704a and the advantages and disadvantages when the storage valve 704a is opened is displayed. It may be configured to do so. Thereby, the player can easily understand the playability. Further, the back type on which the explanatory image is displayed may be configured so that the back type can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. As a result, the player who is accustomed to playing the pachinko machine 10 and fully understands the game playability can change to the back type in which the explanatory image is not displayed.

In this modification, the storage valve 704a is configured to be opened only during the period in which the release button 800 is pressed (operated), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the press (operation) of the release button 800 is detected, the storage valve 704a may be set to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In this case, the operation of the release button 800 may not be accepted during the predetermined period when the storage valve 704a is open. This eliminates the need to keep pressing the release button 800 in order to keep the storage valve 704a open. Further, each time the release button 800 is pressed (operated), the closed state (storage state) and the open state (release state) may be switched. With this configuration, the release button 800 only needs to be operated when it is desired to switch the state, so that the number of operations by the player can be reduced. Further, contrary to the release button 800, an operating means for closing the storage valve 704a by operating the button 800 may be provided. Even with this configuration, as in the present embodiment, each player can be made to select a game property that suits his or her own taste.

In this modified example, when a certain period of time (1 minute) has elapsed since the arrangement was disadvantageous to the player shown in FIG. 87, the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed to release the suggestion display image to the player. Although it is configured to prompt the pressing (operation) of the button 800, the method of pressing (operating) the release button 800 is not limited to this. For example, the frame button 22 and the release button 800 may be integrally configured (that is, the frame button 22 and the release button 800 may be combined into one operation button, and the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 may be used. Each may be electrically connected to each other). Then, when it is determined that the ball entry sensor 704b continuously detects the ball for a certain period (1 minute) or more (that is, the arrangement is disadvantageous to the player shown in FIG. 87), the frame button 22 is pressed. It may be configured so that the variable type in which the effect is developed can be easily selected. As a result, when the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) in order to develop the effect, the storage valve 704a can be set to the open state (release state) at the same time. In general, the player observes the result of the variable effect notifying whether or not it is a big hit with the most interest. Therefore, when the variable effect that develops the effect by pressing the frame button 22 is executed, the frame button 22 is surely pressed. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is being prompted. Therefore, the disadvantageous state (see FIG. 87) can be reset more reliably.

In this modified example, the first specific winning opening 65a is provided below the front view of the first winning opening 64 so that the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a by hitting the left side, but this is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the first specific winning opening 65a may be provided downstream of the storage device 700 as in the first embodiment. As a result, the ball can flow into the first specific winning opening 65a and the storage device 700 simply by hitting right in the special game state (big hit state), so that the prize ball in the special game state (big hit state) can be played. Can be more. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the jackpot.

In each of the above embodiments, the storage valve 607a of the storage device 600 and the storage valve 704a of the storage device 700 are provided with the storage valves by sliding to the front side of the front view and the back side of the front view. The flow path was closed and the ball could be stored in the upper part of the flow path, but the operation of the storage valve is not limited to this. For example, in the closed state, the storage valve is configured to stand vertically with respect to the inner wall portion of the flow path to close the flow path, and in the open state, the storage valve collapses in the downstream direction of the flow path. The flow path may be configured to allow the sphere to pass. Further, the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a do not need to completely close the induction flow path 607 and the induction flow path 704, respectively. For example, in a state where the widths of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a are shortened and the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a protrude toward the front side of the front view, the induction flow path 607 and the induction flow path 704 are partially opened. It may be configured to be. Further, the width of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a may be set so that the width of the open portion is equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the price of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a can be reduced. Further, when the induction flow path 607 or the induction flow path 704 is set to the open state (released state) by the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a, the induction flow path 607 or the induction flow path 704 does not have to be completely opened. .. That is, a part of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a may be in a state of protruding into the induction flow path 607 or the induction flow path 704. Further, the width of the open portion in the guide flow path 607 or the guide flow path 704 may be configured to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, in the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a, the operating range between the open state and the closed state can be narrowed, so that the power consumed for switching the state of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a can be reduced. it can. Further, if the width of the open portion is set to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere, the inflowing sphere may come into contact with the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a to reduce the momentum of the flow, but the sphere will eventually flow down. (It can be made difficult to be stored (held) at the positions of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a). Therefore, even in this configuration, the same operation as in each of the above embodiments can be realized. That is, it is possible to form a state in which a sphere can be stored on the guide flow path 607 and the guide flow path 704, and a state in which the sphere that has flowed into the guide flow path 607 and the guide flow path 704 flows down downstream. ..

In each of the above embodiments, both ends of the ball inlets provided in each storage device are out ports, but the out ports at both ends may be abolished. Even if the out port is abolished and the inner wall is used, the ball can enter another entry port. Further, by eliminating the outlets at both ends, the storage device can be made more compact.

In each of the above embodiments, a plurality of out ports are provided inside the storage device, but instead of the out ports provided inside the storage device, the out ports 66 provided below the front view of the game board 13 It may be a flow path for the sphere to flow down (see FIG. 2). As a result, the number of out ports can be made one, so that it is sufficient to detect only the number of balls that have entered the out port 66 in order to grasp the number of ejected balls. Therefore, the number of detection switches for detecting the entry of a ball can be reduced, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, one ball (a first embodiment, a modified example of the first embodiment, and a second embodiment) or two balls (a modified example of the second embodiment) is stored in the upper part of the storage valve. ), But the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured so that three or more spheres can be stored. Further, when a plurality of spheres are stored, they may be stored in the vertical direction or may be stored side by side. In this case, the number of balls stored in the upper part of the storage valve may be counted. For example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, five balls may be stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a, and the storage valve 607a may be opened when the fifth ball is stored. .. As a result, immediately after the storage valve 607a is opened, five balls flow down to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 all at once, so that a large amount (5 x 15) of winning balls can be paid out in a short time. Can receive. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that he / she wants to store the ball inside the storage device 600, so that the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

In each of the above embodiments, the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a may be closed while the power supply is shut off. That is, when a power cutoff is detected, the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a is set to be closed, and when the power is turned on, the state of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a at the time of power cutoff is restored. You may. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraud in which the ball is inserted into the storage device 600 or the storage device 700 while the power supply is cut off, and the prize ball is immediately obtained when the power is restored.

In each of the above embodiments, the entry port (winning opening) into which the ball flowing into the storage device enters is fixed by the induction flow path through which the ball flows down (that is, the arrangement of each entry port). Was fixed), but it is not limited to this. For example, the position of the entrance may be changed periodically or randomly. More specifically, a known crune or the like may be arranged on the bottom surface of the storage device, and each winning opening (ball entry opening) may be provided in a ring shape on the crune. Then, by rotating the crune, the winning opening (entry opening) into which the ball flowing down each induction flow path flows in may be given randomness. As a result, the player can be made to watch the entrance of the ball that has flowed into the storage device with interest. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In each of the above embodiments, the inside of the storage device is made visible, but the inside of the storage device may be made difficult to see from the front.

In each of the above embodiments, the opening and closing of the storage valve are controlled by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve may be controlled by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. More specifically, the solenoid 610 for the storage device may be electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113. Thereby, the processing load of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to execute the variable effect selection process, the special symbol lottery process, and the like, which are the main processes related to the game, without delay.

In each of the above embodiments, when a ball enters each entry port (winning opening), a number of prize balls corresponding to the type of entry opening (winning opening) are paid out. , Not limited to this. For example, it is applied to a type of pachinko machine such as an enclosed pachinko machine in which a prize ball is not given as a game value. It may be configured to increase the balance.

All or part of each of the above-described embodiments may be combined.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (A prize ball is given to the ball that entered the holding device at the time of a big hit)
A specific flow path branched into a first flow path and a second flow path through which the game ball can flow down, a ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and a ball entry means thereof. Based on the fact that the pachinko ball enters the ball-entry means, the specific privilege-giving means that grants a specific privilege that is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the game ball flows down the second flow path, and the above-mentioned The first distribution state in which the game balls flowing into the specific flow path are easily distributed to the first flow path, and the second distribution state in which the game balls are more easily distributed to the second flow path as compared with the first distribution state. It is provided with a flow path distribution means that can be changed to a distribution state, and a setting means that can set the state of the flow path distribution means to at least the first distribution state and the second distribution state according to the gaming state. The gaming machine A1 characterized by.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a lottery for whether or not a game ball wins based on winning a prize in a specific winning opening. Further, in addition to a specific winning opening, it is known that a plurality of winning openings are provided in which prize balls are paid out when a ball wins a prize. In this conventional gaming machine, the number of prize balls that can be obtained can be changed according to the direction in which the player ejects the game balls by differently paying out the number of prize balls according to the type of winning opening. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-129177).

However, since the number of prize balls that can be obtained by winning is generally larger than that of the prize balls that are paid out by winning the prize opening, the player usually decides whether or not to win. A game ball is launched aiming at a specific winning opening that triggers the execution of a lottery. In other words, it was common for the player to continue launching the game ball in the same direction until it was hit. Therefore, when the player launches the ball in the same direction, the ball continues to win in the same winning opening, and the number of winning balls to be paid out may not change much. That is, there was a risk that the game would become monotonous.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the specific flow path is branched into a first flow path and a second flow path. When a ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and the game ball flows down the second flow path based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means. A specific privilege that is advantageous to the player as compared with the above is given by a predetermined privilege giving means. A first distribution state in which the game balls flowing into the specific flow path are easily distributed to the first flow path, and a second distribution state in which the game balls are more easily distributed to the second flow path as compared with the first distribution state. The flow path distribution means is variable. The state of the flow path distribution means is changed to at least a first distribution state and a second distribution state by the setting means according to the game state.

As a result, in the game state in which the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state, a specific privilege is easily given by the game ball flowing into the specific flow path, and the game is set to the second distribution state. In the state, it becomes difficult to grant certain benefits. Therefore, even if the player launches the game ball toward a specific flow path, the benefits given can be different depending on the game state, so that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous. There is an effect.

In the game machine A1, a predetermined ball is determined based on the normal ball-entry means provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can be entered and the game ball entering the normal ball-entry means. The gaming machine A2 includes a game value-giving means for giving a game value, and the specific privilege-giving means grants a game value greater than the predetermined game value as the specific privilege.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a normal ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and the game value-adding means determines the game value based on the game ball entering the normal ball entry means. The game value is given. By the specific privilege giving means, a game value larger than a predetermined game value is given as a specific privilege.

As a result, in the game state in which the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state, more games are played when the game ball flows into the specific flow path as compared with the game state in which the flow path distribution means is set to the second distribution state. It becomes easier to acquire value. Therefore, since the game value given can be changed according to the game state, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machines A1 or A2, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, and a privilege game in which the gaming state is advantageous to the player based on the lottery result obtained by the lottery means becoming a specific lottery result. The game state setting means for setting the state is provided, and the setting means sets the state of the flow path distribution means to the first distribution state based on the setting of the privilege game state by the game state setting means. The gaming machine A3, which is characterized in that it is set to.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 or A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, and the game state is a privileged game state advantageous to the player by the game state setting means based on the lottery result by the lottery means becoming a specific lottery result. Is set to. Based on the fact that the privilege game state is set by the game state setting means, the state of the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state by the setting means.

As a result, when the game state is set to the privilege game state, in addition to being advantageous to the player depending on the privilege game state, more game value is given by the game ball flowing into the specific flow path. It becomes easy to be done. Therefore, the privileged gaming state can be made more advantageous for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the privileged gaming state can be improved.

In the game machine A3, the variable ball entry means that can be changed between the first ball entry state in which the game ball can be entered and the second ball entry state in which the game ball is harder to enter than the first ball entry state. Based on the specific value-adding means that gives a specific game value based on the game ball entering the variable ball-entry means, and the privileged game state set by the game state setting means. A4 gaming machine A4, characterized in that the variable ball-entry means is provided with variable control means for changing the variable ball-entry means to the first ball-entry state until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable entry means is changed between the first entry state in which the game ball can be entered and the second entry state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first entry state. A specific game value is given by the specific value-adding means based on the game ball entering the ball-entry means. Based on the fact that the game state setting means has set the privilege game state, the variable control means changes the variable ball entry means to the first ball entry state until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

As a result, the game ball can enter the variable ball entry means in the privileged game state, so that a specific game value can be obtained by launching the ball aiming at the variable ball entry means. Therefore, in the privileged game state, it is possible to make the player acquire more game value, so that there is an effect that the player's expectation for the privileged game state can be further increased.

In any of the game machines A2 to A4, the game value-giving means adds a predetermined amount of game medium as the predetermined game value when the game ball enters the normal ball-entry means. The game machine A5 is characterized in that when a game ball enters the ball entry means, the specific privilege granting means grants a game medium in an amount larger than the predetermined amount as the specific privilege.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game ball enters the normal ball entry means by the game value adding means, a predetermined amount of game medium is given as a predetermined game value. When a game ball enters the ball entry means by the specific privilege giving means, a game medium in an amount larger than a predetermined amount is given as a specific privilege.

As a result, the player can be made to play the game by the given game medium, so that the game can be played for a longer time. Therefore, there is an effect that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine A4 or A5, the variable control means changes the variable ball entry means from the second ball entry state to the first ball entry state based on the setting of the privilege game state by the game state setting means. The gaming state setting means sets the gaming state different from the privileged gaming state based on the variable ball entering means being changed a predetermined number of times by the variable control means. A game machine A6 characterized by being a machine to play.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4 or A5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable ball entry means is changed a predetermined number of times from the second ball entry state to the first ball entry state by the variable control means based on the setting of the privilege game state by the game state setting means. A game state different from the privileged game state is set by the game state setting means based on the fact that the variable ball entry means is changed a predetermined number of times by the variable control means.

As a result, in the privileged game state of 1, the player is given a predetermined number of opportunities to put the ball into the variable ball entry means, so that the player can acquire more specific game value. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the privileged gaming state can be further increased.

In any of the game machines A4 to A6, the game machine A7 is characterized in that the specific value-giving means grants a specific amount of game medium as the specific game value.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A4 to A6, a specific amount of gaming medium is added as a specific game value by the specific value-adding means. Can be made to play a game. Therefore, since the player can play the game for a longer time, there is an effect that the operating rate of the game machine can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines A4 to A7, a guidance flow path capable of guiding the game ball to the specific flow path is provided, and the variable ball entry means is the specific flow of the game balls flowing into the guidance flow path. A game machine A8 characterized in that a game ball that has not flowed into the road is provided at a position where the ball can enter.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A4 to A7, the gaming balls are guided to the specific flow path by the guiding flow path, and among the gaming balls flowing into the guiding flow path, the gaming balls flow into the specific flow path. Since the variable ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball that did not flow in can enter, the player simply launches the game ball into the guidance flow path in the privileged game state, and the specific flow path and the variable ball entry ball. The ball can flow into the means. Therefore, since it is possible to acquire a specific privilege and a specific game value in the privileged game state, it is possible to increase the merits of the player in the privileged game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the privileged gaming state can be further increased.

In any of the gaming machines A4 to A8, a counting means for counting the number of game balls that have entered the variable ball entering means is provided, and the variable control means has at least a predetermined number of the number counted by the counting means. The variable ball-entry means is changed to the second ball-entry state based on the above, and the game state setting means is the privilege game when a specific condition is satisfied in the privilege game state. The game state different from the state is set, and the setting means sets the flow path distribution means at least in a predetermined period from the setting of the privilege game state to the establishment of the specific condition. 1 A game machine A9 characterized in that it is set to a distribution state.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A4 to A8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means is counted by the counting means. The variable ball entry means is changed to the second ball entry state by the variable control means based on at least the number counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number. When a specific condition is satisfied in the privileged game state, a game state different from the privileged game state is set by the game state setting means. The flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state by the setting means at least in a predetermined period from the setting of the privilege game state to the establishment of the specific condition.

As a result, the opportunity for the player to acquire a specific game value can be limited to the time when a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to play the game during the privilege game state in the hope that more game balls will flow into the specific flow path before the predetermined number is reached and the specific privilege will be given more times. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player with respect to the privileged gaming state can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines A3 to A9, a ball entry detecting means for detecting that a game ball has entered the normal ball entry means, and the ball entry detecting means to the normal ball entry means during the privilege game state. The gaming machine A10 is provided with a notification means for executing a predetermined notification when it is detected that the game ball has entered.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A3 to A9, the entry of a game ball into the normal ball entry means is detected by the entry detection means, and the special game is performed by the entry detection means. When it is detected that a game ball has entered the normal ball entry means during the state, a predetermined notification is executed by the notification means, so that the flow path distribution means is set even though it is set to the privilege game state. When a problem that is not set in the first distribution state occurs, the player or the clerk in the hall can be made aware of the problem by a predetermined notification. Therefore, there is an effect that the defect can be quickly resolved.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the first flow path is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path is more likely to flow than the second flow path. The flow path distribution means opens the first flow path in the first distribution state and closes the first flow path in the second distribution state, and the second flow path is the first flow path. The gaming machine A11 is provided at a position where a gaming ball that has flowed into the specific channel is easily guided while the channel is closed.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first flow path is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path is more likely to flow in than the second flow path. The flow path distribution means opens the first flow path in the first distribution state and closes the first flow path in the second distribution state. The second flow path is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path is easily guided while the first flow path is closed.

Thereby, the flow path through which the game ball flowing into the specific flow path flows down can be changed depending on whether or not the first flow path is closed. Therefore, even if the game ball is continuously launched toward the specific flow path, the specific privilege is given or not given, so that there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous. ..

In the gaming machine A11, the flow path distribution means can hold up to a predetermined upper limit number of game balls on the upstream side of the closed position when the first flow path is closed in the second distribution state. In the second flow path, in a state where a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are held on the first flow path, the held game balls come into contact with the game balls that have flowed into the specific flow path. The gaming machine A12 is characterized in that it is provided at a position where it is easy to flow in based on the change in the flow direction.

According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first flow path is closed as the second distribution state, the flow path distribution means holds the game balls up to a predetermined upper limit number on the upstream side of the closed position. Based on the fact that in a state where a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are held on the first flow path, the held game balls come into contact with the game balls that have flowed into the specific flow path and the flow direction changes. A second flow path is provided at a position where it can easily flow in.

As a result, even if the game ball is continuously launched toward the specific flow path, the specific privilege is given or not given, so that the effect that the game becomes monotonous can be suppressed. is there.

Each of the gaming machines A1 to A12 is provided with a display means for displaying an image and a display control means for controlling the display means to display an image according to the state of the flow path distribution means. A featured gaming machine A13.

According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A12, the display controlling means controls the display means so that an image corresponding to the state of the flow path distribution means is displayed. , There is an effect that the player can easily recognize the state of the flow path distribution means.

In the gaming machine A13, the display control means is said to be specific when the game ball flows into the specific flow path based on the setting means setting the flow path distribution means to the first distribution state. The gaming machine A14 is characterized in that it displays an image suggesting that a privilege is likely to be given.

According to the game machine A14, in addition to the effect of the game machine A13, the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state by the setting means, and it is specified when the game ball flows into the specific flow path. An image suggesting that the privilege of is likely to be given is displayed by the display control means. As a result, even if the player is a beginner, there is an effect that the merit when the game ball flows into the specific flow path can be easily understood.

<Feature B group> (Switch the flow path of another sphere with the sphere held in the holding device)
A specific flow path branched into a plurality of flow paths including at least a first flow path and a second flow path through which the game ball can flow down, and a game ball flowing down the first flow path are provided at positions where the ball can enter. The first ball-entry means, the first granting means for imparting the first game value based on the game ball entering the first ball-entry means, and the game flowing down the second flow path. The first game given by the first giving means based on the second ball entering means provided at a position where the ball can enter and the game ball entering the second ball entering means. A second granting means for imparting a second gaming value different from the value, a first position capable of holding at least one gaming ball flowing into the first flow path on the first flow path, and a first position thereof. A variable means that can change the game ball that has flowed into the first flow path to a second position that is difficult to be held on the first flow path as compared to the position, and the variable means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. The variable means includes a switching means for switching from the first position to the second position, and the variable means easily guides the game ball to the second flow path by holding the game ball. A gaming machine B1 characterized by being a game machine.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a lottery for whether or not a game ball wins based on winning a prize in a specific winning opening. Further, in addition to a specific winning opening, it is known that a plurality of winning openings are provided in which prize balls are paid out when a ball wins a prize. In this conventional gaming machine, the number of prize balls that can be obtained can be changed according to the direction in which the player ejects the game balls by differently paying out the number of prize balls according to the type of winning opening. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-129177).

However, since the number of prize balls that can be obtained by winning is generally larger than that of the prize balls that are paid out by winning the prize opening, the player usually decides whether or not to win. A game ball is launched aiming at a specific winning opening that triggers the execution of a lottery. In other words, it was common for the player to continue launching the game ball in the same direction until it was hit. Therefore, when the player launches the ball in the same direction, the ball continues to win in the same winning opening, and the number of winning balls to be paid out may not change much. That is, there was a risk that the game would become monotonous.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine B1, the specific flow path is branched into a plurality of flow paths including at least a first flow path and a second flow path. The first ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and the first ball is first provided by the first granting means based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means. The game value of is given. Further, a second ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter the ball, and the first granting means is used based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. A second game value different from the first game value to be given is given by the second giving means. A first position capable of holding at least one game ball flowing into the first flow path on the first flow path, and a game ball flowing into the first flow path as compared to the first position are on the first flow path. The variable means is variable to the second position, which is difficult to hold. The variable means is switched from the first position to the second position by the switching means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. Here, when the game ball is held by the variable means, the game ball is easily guided to the second flow path by the held game ball.

As a result, even if the player continues to launch the game ball toward the specific flow path, the ball entry means for the game ball flowing into the specific flow path to enter depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. Can be different. Therefore, the game value acquired by the player can be varied between the first game value and the second game value depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine B1, the first gaming value given by the first giving means has a higher gaming value than the second gaming value given by the second giving means. Pachinko machine B2.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the first game value given by the first granting means is configured to have a larger game value than the second game value given by the second granting means, it is configured for the player. It is possible to make the player feel that the game ball wants to flow into the specific flow path in a state where the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machines B1 or B2, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions and a privileged gaming state advantageous to the player are set based on the lottery result obtained by the lottery means becoming a specific lottery result. Variable entry state that can be changed between the game state setting means, the first entry state in which the game ball can be entered, and the second entry state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first entry state. Based on the means, the specific value-adding means for giving a specific game value based on the game ball entering the variable ball-entry means, and the privileged gaming state set by the game state setting means. The variable control means is provided to change the variable ball entry means to the first ball entry state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the switching means is set to the privileged gaming state by the game state setting means. Based on this, the gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the variable means is switched from the first position to the second position.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, and the game state is a privileged game state advantageous to the player by the game state setting means based on the lottery result by the lottery means becoming a specific lottery result. Is set to. The variable entry means is changed between the first entry state in which the game ball can be entered and the second entry state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first entry state, and the variable entry state is changed. A specific game value is given by the specific value-giving means based on the game ball entering the means. Based on the fact that the game state setting means has set the privilege game state, the variable ball entry means is changed to the first ball entry state until a predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable control means.

As a result, in addition to the player being able to obtain a specific game value by entering the game ball into the variable ball entry means in the privileged game state, the game ball enters the first ball entry means. The player can acquire the first game value. Therefore, since the merits of the player in the privileged gaming state can be increased, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the privileged gaming state can be further increased.

The gaming machine B3 is provided with a guiding flow path capable of guiding the game ball to the specific flow path, and the variable ball entry means is such that the gaming ball flowing down the guiding flow path without flowing into the specific flow path. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that it is provided at a position where it can enter a ball.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball is guided to the specific flow path by the guidance flow path. A variable ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the induction flow path without flowing into the specific flow path can enter the ball.

As a result, the player can flow the ball into the specific flow path and the variable ball entry means simply by launching the game ball into the guidance flow path in the privileged game state. Therefore, in the privileged game state, the first game value and the specific game value can be obtained, so that the player's merit in the privileged game state can be further increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the privileged gaming state can be further increased.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, at a position where a third flow path, which is one of the plurality of branched flow paths in the specific flow path, and a game ball flowing down the third flow path can enter. A third game value different from the second game value given by the second giving means based on the provided third ball entering means and the game ball entering the third ball entering means. A third granting means for imparting game value is provided, and the variable means holds a gaming ball so that the holding gaming ball causes the gaming ball to be connected to the second flow path and the third flow path. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being easy to guide.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are exhibited. A third flow path is provided as one of a plurality of branched flow paths in the specific flow path. A third ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the third flow path can enter. Based on the fact that the game ball enters the third ball entry means, a third game value different from the second game value given by the second granting means is given by the third granting means. When the game ball is held by the variable means, the game ball is guided to the second flow path and the third flow path by the held game ball.

As a result, when the game ball is held by the variable means, the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path can enter both the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means. Become. That is, since the player can acquire one of the second game value and the third game value, which have different game values, the game value acquired by the player can be given randomness. .. On the other hand, when the variable means is changed to the second position, the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path enters the first ball entry means, so that the first game value is given by the first granting means. Therefore, the game value acquired by the player can be stabilized. Therefore, different playability can be realized depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B5, the third gaming value given by the third granting means has a higher gaming value than the first gaming value given by the first granting means. Pachinko machine B6.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the third gaming value given by the third granting means has more gaming value than the first gaming value given by the first granting means. Therefore, it is possible to expect the game ball to flow down the third flow path in a state where the game ball is held by the variable means. Therefore, since the traveling direction of the game ball flowing into the specific flow path can be observed more interestingly by the player, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B5 or B6, when the variable means holds the game ball on the first flow path, the game ball that has flowed into at least the specific flow path is arranged as the arrangement of the held game ball. It is characterized in that it can be held by a first arrangement that makes it easier to be guided to the flow path and a second arrangement that makes it easier to be guided to the third flow path as compared with the first arrangement. Pachinko machine B7.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5 or B6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game ball is held on the first flow path by the variable means, at least the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path is easily guided to the second flow path as the arrangement of the held game ball. It is held by the arrangement of 1 and the second arrangement that makes it easier to be guided to the third flow path as compared with the first arrangement.

This has the effect that the player can determine the flow path through which the game balls are likely to flow only by checking the arrangement of the game balls.

In the gaming machine B7, a discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the arrangement of the gaming balls held by the variable means is the first arrangement, and an effect of executing a specific effect indicating the discriminating result by the discriminating means. A gaming machine B8 comprising an executing means.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, whether or not the arrangement of the game balls held by the variable means is the first arrangement is determined by the determination means, and a specific effect indicating the determination result by the determination means is executed by the effect execution means. , There is an effect that the player can more easily identify the flow path through which the game ball is likely to flow.

One of the gaming machines B5 to B8 is characterized by providing an adjusting means capable of adjusting the ratio of the game balls flowing into the specific flow path into the second flow path and the third flow path, respectively. The gaming machine B9.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B5 to B8, the ratio of the game balls flowing into the specific flow path into the second flow path and the third flow path is adjusted by the adjusting means, respectively. Since the adjustment is made, it is possible to make the gaming machine easy to be given the second privilege or the gaming machine to be easily given the third privilege according to the business policy of the hall. Therefore, there is an effect that the specifications of the gaming machine can be easily adjusted according to the business policy of each hall.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the switching means includes an operating means that can be operated by the player and a detecting means that detects an operation on the operating means, and the switching means can operate the operating means by the detecting means. The gaming machine B10, characterized in that the variable means is switched from the first position to the second position based on the detection.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the operation on the operating means is detected by the detecting means. The variable means is switched from the first position to the second position by the switching means based on the detection of the operation on the operating means by the detecting means.

As a result, it is possible for the player to switch whether or not to let the game ball that has flowed down into the specific flow path flow down to the first ball entry means, so that each player has his or her own taste. It has the effect of being able to set the state.

A gaming machine B11, wherein in any of the gaming machines B1 to B10, the variable means can hold only one gaming ball on the first flow path.

According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B10, only one gaming ball is held by the variable means on the first flow path, so that the variable means is changed to the first position. When the player quits the game, the number of game balls remaining on the first flow path can be minimized by being held by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is difficult for the player to feel that he / she has lost when he / she quits the game.

<Characteristic C group> (The probability variation ratio can be changed by adjusting the ratio of balls entering the holding device)
A specific flow path that at least branches into a first flow path and a second flow path through which the game ball can flow down, and a first entry ball provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter. The means, the first privilege granting means capable of granting the first privilege based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the gaming ball flowing down the second flow path. Based on the second ball entry means provided at the position where the ball can be entered and the game ball entering the second ball entry means, a second privilege different from the first privilege is given. A second privilege granting means capable of this, and an adjusting means capable of adjusting the ratio of the game balls flowing down the specific flow path to the first flow path and the second flow path, respectively. A gaming machine C1 characterized by being equipped with.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a lottery for whether or not a game ball wins based on winning a prize in a specific winning opening. Further, in addition to a specific winning opening, it is known that a plurality of winning openings are provided in which prize balls are paid out when a ball wins a prize. In this conventional gaming machine, the number of prize balls that can be obtained can be changed according to the direction in which the player ejects the game balls by differently paying out the number of prize balls according to the type of winning opening. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-129177).

However, since the number of prize balls that can be obtained by winning is generally larger than that of the prize balls that are paid out by winning the prize opening, the player usually decides whether or not to win. A game ball is launched aiming at a specific winning opening that triggers the execution of a lottery. In other words, it was common for the player to continue launching the game ball in the same direction until it was hit. Therefore, when a player plays a game on a gaming machine of the same model, as long as the ball is launched in the same direction, the ball will continue to win in the same winning opening, and the number of winning balls to be paid out will not change much. There was a case. That is, there was a risk that the game would become monotonous.

According to the gaming machine C1, a specific flow path is branched into a first flow path and a second flow path through which the game ball can flow down. A first ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and based on the fact that the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the first privilege granting means is used. 1 privilege is given. It is different from the first privilege based on the fact that the second ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter the ball, and the game ball enters the second ball entering means. The second privilege is granted by the second privilege granting means. The ratio of the game ball flowing down the specific flow path into the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is adjusted by the adjusting means.

As a result, by adjusting the adjusting means, it is possible to make a gaming machine to which the first privilege is easily given, or a gaming machine to which the second privilege is easily given. Therefore, even if the same model is used, different playability can be realized by changing the degree of adjustment by the adjusting means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine C1, a lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, and a privilege game for giving a privileged game advantageous to the player when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result. The granting means, the first lottery state in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific lottery result is high, and the second lottery state in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific lottery result is lower than the first lottery state. A lottery state setting means that can be set is provided, and the first privilege granting means is controlled so that the first lottery state is set by the lottery state setting means as the first privilege. Game machine C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, a predetermined lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, and the game is played when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result. The privileged game that is advantageous to the person is given by the privileged game granting means. The lottery state setting means sets the first lottery state in which the lottery result by the lottery means has a high probability of becoming a specific lottery result and the second lottery state in which the probability of becoming a specific lottery result is lower than the first lottery state. .. As the first privilege, the first privilege granting means is controlled so that the first lottery state is set by the lottery state setting means.

Thereby, the ease of transition to the first lottery state can be adjusted by the adjusting means. Therefore, it is easy to set the first lottery state according to the business policy of the hall, and it is easy to be in the privilege game state, or it is difficult to set the first lottery state, and it is easy to give the second privilege. You can adjust what to do. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a highly versatile gaming machine that can be adapted to the business policy of each hall.

In the gaming machines C1 or C2, the gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the second privilege granting means grants a predetermined amount of gaming medium as the second privilege.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, a predetermined amount of the gaming medium is given as the second privilege by the second privilege giving means, so that the predetermined amount of the gaming medium can be easily given. Can be adjusted by the adjusting means. Therefore, depending on the business policy of the hall, it is possible to adjust whether the game property is such that a predetermined amount of game medium is easily given or the first privilege is easily given. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a highly versatile gaming machine that can be adapted to the business policy of each hall.

In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the first position in which the gaming ball can enter the first entering means and the second position in which the gaming ball is less likely to enter the entering means as compared with the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a position, and a variable control means that changes the variable means to the first position until a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the privilege game being granted by the privilege game granting means. A gaming machine C4 characterized by being provided with.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C2 or C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is variable by the variable means to the first position where the game ball can enter the first ball entry means and the second position where the game ball is less likely to enter the ball entry means compared to the first position. Will be done. Based on the privilege game being granted by the privilege game granting means, the variable control means is variable to the first position until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

As a result, the first privilege is easily given in the privilege game state, so that there is an effect that the player's expectation for the privilege game can be increased.

In the gaming machine C4, the variable control means changes the variable means to the second position at least based on the elapse of a predetermined time after the variable means is changed to the first position. A gaming machine C5 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, at least the variable means is moved to the second position by the variable control means based on the elapse of a predetermined time after the variable means is changed to the first position. Since it is variable, it is possible to limit the opportunity for the player to acquire the first privilege until a predetermined time elapses. Therefore, since the rarity value of the first privilege can be increased, the importance of adjustment by the adjustment means can be increased. Therefore, when the player selects the gaming machine to play the game, the gaming machine can be selected in consideration of the adjustment degree of the adjusting means, so that there is an effect that the pleasure of selecting the gaming machine can be given. ..

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, from the specific entry means to which a specific game value is given based on the entry of the game ball and the specific game value based on the entry of the game ball. The second flow path includes a specific flow path for allowing the game ball to flow down to the specific ball entry means, and the low value ball entry means, which is provided with a low value ball entry means. It is branched into a low-value flow path to be flowed down, and is at a first variable position capable of holding at least one game ball flowing into the specific flow path on the specific flow path and at the first variable position thereof. The gaming machine C6 is characterized by comprising, for example, a position-changing means capable of changing a second variable position in which the gaming ball flowing into the specific flow path is difficult to be held on the specific flow path.

According to the game machine C6, in any of the game machines C1 to C5, a specific game value is given based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry means, and the game machine enters the low value ball entry means. A game value less than a specific game value is given based on the ball. The second flow path is branched into a specific flow path that causes the game ball to flow down to the specific ball entry means and a low value flow path that causes the game ball to flow down to the low value ball entry means. A first variable position capable of holding at least one game ball flowing into the specific flow path on the specific flow path, and a game ball flowing into the specific flow path are held on the specific flow path as compared with the first variable position. The position changing means is changed to the second variable position which is difficult to be set.

As a result, even if the player continues to launch the game ball toward the second flow path, the ball entry means by which the game ball flowing into the second flow path enters according to the variable position of the position variable means is provided. Can be different. Therefore, the game value acquired by the player can be changed according to the variable position of the position changing means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine C6 includes a holding control means for controlling the position variable means to be changed to the second variable position based on the privilege game being granted by the privilege game granting means, and the specific flow path. Is arranged at a position where the gaming ball that has flowed into the second flow path is easier to flow in as compared with the low-value flow path, and the position-variable means holds the game ball by holding it. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that it facilitates guiding the gaming ball to the low-value flow path by the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the position changing means is changed to the second variable position by the holding control means based on the fact that the privilege game is given by the privilege game giving means. The specific flow path is arranged at a position where the game ball that has flowed into the second flow path is more likely to flow than the low value flow path. When the game ball is held by the position-variable means, the held game ball guides the game ball to the low-value flow path.

As a result, the variable position of the position-variable means and the ball-entry means into which the game ball that has flowed into the second flow path can be different depending on whether or not the game ball is held by the position-variable means. .. Therefore, the game value acquired by the player can be changed according to the variable position of the position changing means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

A gaming machine C9 in any of the gaming machines C6 to C8, wherein the variable means and the position variable means are composed of one member.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C6 to C8, since the variable means and the position variable means are composed of one member, the position and position of the variable means can be changed by one control. The position of the means can be switched at the same time. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the adjusting means causes the gaming ball to enter the second entry when the ratio of the gaming ball flowing down into the specific flow path to the first entering means is increased. When the ratio of the game ball flowing into the ball means is reduced and the ratio of the game ball flowing into the first ball entering means is lowered, the ratio of the game ball flowing into the second ball entering means is increased. A gaming machine C10 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the game is played when the ratio of the gaming balls flowing down into the specific flow path into the first flow path is increased by the adjusting means. The rate at which the spheres flow into the second flow path is reduced. Further, when the ratio of the game balls flowing down into the specific flow path into the first flow path is lowered by the adjusting means, the ratio of the game balls flowing into the second flow path is increased.

This has the effect that the game ball can be more reliably flowed into the flow path on the side where the ratio is increased.

A gaming machine Z1 in any of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B11, and C1 to C10, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine Z2 in any of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B11, and C1 to C10, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A gaming machine Z3 in any of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B11, and C1 to C10, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not a game ball wins based on winning a prize in a specific winning opening. Further, in addition to a specific winning opening, it is known that a plurality of winning openings are provided in which prize balls are paid out when a ball wins a prize. In this conventional gaming machine, the number of prize balls that can be obtained can be changed according to the direction in which the player ejects the game balls by differently paying out the number of prize balls according to the type of winning opening. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-129177).
Since the number of prize balls that can be obtained by winning is generally larger than the number of prize balls that are paid out by winning a prize in the winning opening, the player usually draws a lottery as to whether or not the prize is won. Launch a game ball aiming at a specific winning opening that triggers execution. In other words, it was common for the player to continue launching the game ball in the same direction until it was hit. Therefore, when a player plays a game on a gaming machine of the same model, as long as the ball is launched in the same direction, the ball will continue to win in the same winning opening, and the number of winning balls to be paid out will not change much. There was a case. That is, there was a risk that the game would become monotonous.
The technical idea has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the game from becoming monotonous.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has a specific flow path that is at least branched into a first flow path and a second flow path through which the game ball can flow, and a game that flows down the first flow path. The first privilege can be given based on the first ball entering means provided at a position where the ball can enter and the game ball entering the first ball entering means. Based on the privilege giving means, the second ball entering means provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and the game ball entering the second ball entering means. A second privilege granting means capable of granting a second privilege different from the first privilege, and a gaming ball flowing down the specific flow path are the first flow path and the second flow path. It is provided with an adjusting means capable of adjusting each of the ratios flowing into the machine.
In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery based on the establishment of the lottery conditions and the lottery result by the lottery means are the specific lottery results in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1. A privilege game granting means for granting a privilege game advantageous to the player in the case, a first lottery state in which the lottery result by the lottery means has a high probability of becoming the specific lottery result, and the specificity rather than the first lottery state. The first lottery state setting means can be set to the second lottery state in which the probability of the lottery result is low, and the first privilege granting means is the first lottery state set means by the lottery state setting means as the first privilege. Is controlled so that is set.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, and the second privilege giving means grants a predetermined amount of the gaming medium as the second privilege.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, a specific flow path is branched into a first flow path and a second flow path through which the game ball can flow down. A first ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and based on the fact that the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the first privilege granting means is used. 1 privilege is given. It is different from the first privilege based on the fact that the second ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter the ball, and the game ball enters the second ball entering means. The second privilege is granted by the second privilege granting means. The ratio of the game ball flowing down the specific flow path into the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is adjusted by the adjusting means.
As a result, by adjusting the adjusting means, it is possible to make a gaming machine to which the first privilege is easily given, or a gaming machine to which the second privilege is easily given. Therefore, even if the same model is used, different playability can be realized by changing the degree of adjustment by the adjusting means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1. That is, when a predetermined lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions and the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result, a privilege game advantageous to the player is given by the privilege game granting means. To. The lottery state setting means sets the first lottery state in which the lottery result by the lottery means has a high probability of becoming a specific lottery result and the second lottery state in which the probability of becoming a specific lottery result is lower than the first lottery state. .. As the first privilege, the first privilege granting means is controlled so that the first lottery state is set by the lottery state setting means.
Thereby, the ease of transition to the first lottery state can be adjusted by the adjusting means. Therefore, it is easy to set the first lottery state according to the business policy of the hall, and it is easy to be in the privilege game state, or it is difficult to set the first lottery state, and it is easy to give the second privilege. You can adjust what to do. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a highly versatile gaming machine that can be adapted to the business policy of each hall.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 or 2. That is, since a predetermined amount of game medium is given as the second privilege by the second privilege giving means, the ease with which the predetermined amount of the game medium is given can be adjusted by the adjusting means.
Thereby, it is possible to adjust whether the game property is such that a predetermined amount of game medium is easily given or the game property is easy to be given the first privilege according to the business policy of the hall. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a highly versatile gaming machine that can be adapted to the business policy of each hall.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
65a 1st specified winning opening (variable ball entry means)
112 Launch control device (launch means)
601 General winning opening (second ball entry means)
602 General winning opening ( first ball entry means)
606 lead flow path (second flow path)
607 induction flow path (first flow path)
607a storage valve (variable means)
650a 2nd specific winning opening ( variable ball entry means)
701 General winning opening (first ball entry means)
702 General winning opening (third ball entry means)
703d general winning opening (second ball entry means)
704 lead flow path (first flow path)
704a storage valve (variable means)
706 lead flow path (third flow path)
708 lead flow path (second flow path)
800 release button (operation means)
S218 Variable game execution means S305 Discrimination means
S1103 switching means
S1202, S1203 variable control means
S1302 switching means
S1406 Variable control means
S4003, S4007 switching means
S4402, S4404 variable control means

Claims (2)

Gaming ball that is launched in a particular direction is provided on ball entrance possible positions, a first shaped on purpose Yu Technical sphere capable ball entrance, second shape game balls than its first state becomes difficult ball entrance He deliberately and variable, variable ball entrance means,
Discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of discrimination conditions,
Based on the fact that a specific determination result in the determination by the determination means, variable game executing for executing a variable game that said variable ball entrance means is a predetermined number of times the variable to said first state from said second state In a gaming machine equipped with means
A first ball entrance means before Symbol particular direction launched the gaming ball is provided on ball entrance possible positions,
A first position that enables ball entrance before SL emitted to a particular direction gaming ball before Symbol first ball entrance means, and its Yu TECHNICAL sphere than the first position, the first ball entrance means ball entrance The second position , which is difficult to do, and the variable means that can be changed to
A second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, which is provided at a position where the game ball launched in the specific direction can enter the ball,
By performing a specific process that is not performed when a game ball enters the second ball entry means, the degree of advantage when the game ball enters the first ball entry means is defined as a high degree of advantage. With the means to make it
In the second ball entry means, the variable means is changed to the second position rather than a game ball flowing down in the direction of the variable means in a state where the variable means is changed to the first position. The game ball that has flowed down in the direction of the variable means in the state is provided at a position where it is easier to be guided.
Said varying means, during the execution of the variable game, the variable ball entrance means is variable in the first position while is variable in the second state, the variable ball entrance means the first state a configuration that can be varied to the second position while being variable, the
The gaming machine, wherein configuration der Rukoto viewable in a specific time period in which the display mode is a predetermined specific display mode may be updated according to the number of game balls that ball entrance to the first ball entrance means A game machine to be. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball.

Images